190-01499-02_24

GTX 3X5 Transponder
TSO Installation Manual
190-01499-02 January 2024 Revision 24

Copyright Information
© 2015-2024 Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries

All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated,
downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior written consent of Garmin.
Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a
hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to print one copy of this manual or of any revision
hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this
copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision
hereto is strictly prohibited.
© 2023 Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Garmin®, aera®, Connext®, Fltplan®, flyGarmin.com®, flyGarmin®, G1000®, G1000® NXi, G2000®, G3000®, G5000®,
G950®, GDL®, GNC®, are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries. GDU™, GTN™, G3X™,
G3XT™, GMA™, GNS™, GRA™, GTS™, and GTX™ are trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries.
All other product or company names that may be mentioned in this publication are trade names, trademarks, or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
For information about the Aviation Limited Warranty refer to Garmin’s website.
For product support, visit Garmin's aviation support center. (https://support.garmin.com/en-US/aviation/)
190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Rev. 24 Page i
Record of Revisions
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Subject

Update for main software v2.85. Expanded guidance for use of ARINC 743A
24 01/04/24
position sources.
23 09/14/23 Update for ADS-B software v3.51.
22 06/13/23 Added TSO deviation information.
21 08/10/22 New device part numbers added to tables.
20 06/08/22 Added support for GTX 3X5 main/ADS-B software v2.70/v3.40.
19 12/06/21 Added v2.65 functionality.
18 09/23/21 Added TSO-C145e information.
17 05/21/21 Added information concerning GTX 3X5(R) and other minor edits.
16 07/02/20 Added information concerning main board v2.60 and ADS-B board v3.20.
15 04/14/20 Updated weights and added mechanical drawings for GTX 335DR/345DR.
14 07/02/19 Updated aircraft category descriptions and selections.
Added pressure sensor module information, available backplate assemblies, and
13 04/01/19
TAS/TCAS information. Refer to the change description.
12 02/08/19 Added information about diversity units.
Updated software of unit main board to v2.50 and updated ADS-B board to
11 07/10/18
v3.00.
10 12/15/17 Added GTX 325 information and other minor edits.
9 06/29/17 Added NV unit part numbers, updated unit weights, and other minor edits.
6 08/04/16 Updated for v2.05 and changed standard rack P/N.
5 03/07/16 Updated part numbers in figure B-1 “GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Assembly.”
Added information for vertical remote mount and other minor edits. Refer to
4 02/26/16
current revision description.
3 02/11/16 Removed GTX 325.
2 12/14/15 Reorganized manual.
1 05/08/15 Experimental release.

Rev. 24 Page ii
Change Description
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
SECTION DESCRIPTION
5.9 Added note to section.
A.2 Added note 1, note 2, and note 3 to table A-3 “ARINCE 743A Inputs.”
C.1 Added note to GMX 200 in table C-1 “ADS-B In Displays.”
C.1 Added note to MX20 in table C-1 “ADS-B In Displays.”
C.2 Added “Various” as manufacturer in table C-2 “GPS Sources.”
C.7 Added note to “Honeywell (Bendix/King) manufacturer in table C-7 “Traffics Sensors.”
E.3 Updated note for section CS ACNS.D.ADSB.025 Provision of Data in table E-3 “ADS-B.”
Updated note for section CS ACNS.D.ADSB.070 Horizontal Position and Velocity Data Sources in
E.3
table E-3 “ADS-B.”
Updated note for section CS ACNS.D.ADSB.120 Horizontal Position Uncompensated Latency in
E.3
table E-3 “ADS-B.”
E.3 Added note 1 to table E-3 “ADS-B.”
Appendix F Added “AC 20-165B Compliance Matrix” section.

Rev. 24 Page iii
Software Agreement
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) issued by the
United States Department of Commerce (15 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and which
may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United States without first
obtaining an export license.
This information in this document is subject to change without notice. For updates and supplemental information
regarding the operation of Garmin products visit flyGarmin.com.
SOFTWARE LICENSE NOTIFICATION

AES Encryption
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 Dr. Brian Gladman, subject to the following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes)
provided:
 Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following
disclaimer.
 Distribution in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other associated materials.
 The copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written
permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, provided this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU
General Public License (GPL) in which case the provisions of the GPL apply INSTEAD OF those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties,
including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GARMIN AVIATION PRODUCTS
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN
PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a
limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the
normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software
remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of Garmin
and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international
copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable
trade secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable
trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify,
reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any
derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in violation
of the export control laws of the United States of America.

Rev. 24 Page iv
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING
A WARNING MEANS INJURY OR DEATH IS POSSIBLE.
CAUTION
A CAUTION MEANS THAT DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT IS POSSIBLE.
NOTE
A note provides additional information.
WARNING
THIS PRODUCT’S PACKAGING AND COMPONENTS CONTAIN CHEMICALS KNOWN TO THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE CANCER, BIRTH DEFECTS, OR REPRODUCTIVE HARM. THIS NOTICE IS
PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CALIFORNIA'S PROPOSITION 65. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS OR
WOULD LIKE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO GARMIN’S WEBSITE,
WWW.GARMIN.COM/PROP65.
WARNING
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL – SPECIAL HANDLING CAN APPLY.
REFER TO HTTPS://DTSC.CA.GOV/PERCHLORATE/.
NOTE
All screen shots used in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen shots are intended
to provide visual reference only. All information depicted in screen shots, including software file names,
versions, and part numbers, are subject to change.

Rev. 24 Page v
Table of Contents
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Equipment Description.............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 ADS-B Capabilities .................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5 FIS-B Capabilities....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6 TIS System Capabilities.............................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.7 Interface Summary.................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.8 General Specifications............................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.9 Transponder Specifications...................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.10 UAT Receiver Specifications (GTX 345 Only) .......................................................................................... 1-12
1.11 GTX 345 1090 MHz Receiver Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-12
1.12 GPS Specifications (Units with Internal GPS Only) .................................................................................. 1-12
1.13 Power Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.14 Certification.......................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.15 License Requirements............................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.16 Reference Documents ........................................................................................................................... 1-21
2 LIMITATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
3 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Unit Configurations .................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Accessories Supplied ................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.4 Optional Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.5 Necessary Installation Materials and Accessories Not Supplied ................................................................. 3-14
3.6 Necessary Special Tools ........................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.7 Transponder Antenna ............................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.8 GPS Antenna Requirements .................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.9 Minimum Systems Configuration ............................................................................................................ 3-17
3.10 GTX Input Source Priority ...................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.11 ADS-B In Considerations ....................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.12 Bluetooth Considerations...................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.13 AHRS Considerations ............................................................................................................................ 3-30
3.14 Field Enablements ................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.15 GPS/SBAS Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.16 Antenna Considerations........................................................................................................................ 3-31
3.17 Electrical Bonding ................................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.18 Cabling and Wiring............................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.19 Electrical Bonding Considerations.......................................................................................................... 3-34
3.20 Cooling Requirements and Considerations ............................................................................................ 3-34
3.21 Position Source (GPS Equipped Units Only)............................................................................................ 3-34
4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Wire Harness Installation........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Backshell Assembly Parts........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Shielded Cable Preparation ....................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4 Connector and Backshell Assembly ........................................................................................................... 4-5
4.5 Configuration Module Installation............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.6 Coax Cable Installation ........................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.7 Equipment Rack Installation .................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.8 Panel and Standard Remote Mount Unit Installation and Removal........................................................... 4-13
4.9 Vertical Remote Mount Unit Installation and Removal ............................................................................. 4-14
5 CONNECTOR PINOUT INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Connector Layouts.................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Rev. 24 Page vi
Table of Contents
5.2 Main Board Connector - J3251 ................................................................................................................. 5-2

5.3 ADS-B Board Connector - J3252 (GTX 345 Only)....................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Power ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Lighting Bus.............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.6 Altitude Inputs .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.7 Discrete I/O ............................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.8 Serial Data Interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.9 Suppression Bus...................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.10 OAT Input............................................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.11 Audio Output ....................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.12 Time Mark ............................................................................................................................................ 5-11
5.13 Configuration Module .......................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.14 USB Interface ........................................................................................................................................ 5-12
6 POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION & CHECKOUT ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 System Configuration Overview ................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks....................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Configuration Mode and Settings ............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.4 Audio Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.5 Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.6 Unit Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.7 Display Pages .......................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.8 Sensors ................................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.9 ADSB ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-31
6.10 Antenna (Diversity Units Only)............................................................................................................... 6-36
6.11 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 6-38
6.12 Remote Unit Configuration ................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.13 Ground Check - GPS Reception Check .................................................................................................. 6-40
6.14 Ground Check - Transponder................................................................................................................ 6-41
6.15 Software Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 6-41
7 CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
APPENDIX A DATA FORMATS .................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 RS-232 Air Data Input Format...................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 ARINC 429 Input Formats .........................................................................................................................A-6
A.3 ARINC 429 Output Formats ....................................................................................................................A-12
A.4 RS-232 National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) 0183 Input Format ...........................................A-17
A.5 RS-232 Aviation Input Format.................................................................................................................A-20
APPENDIX B GTX 3X5 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................... B-1
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. C-1
C.1 ADS-B In Displays .....................................................................................................................................C-2
C.2 GPS Sources .............................................................................................................................................C-4
C.3 Altitude Sources .......................................................................................................................................C-7
C.4 Audio Panels ..........................................................................................................................................C-10
C.5 Radio Altimeters .....................................................................................................................................C-10
C.6 Heading Reference Sources ....................................................................................................................C-11
C.7 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only) ...............................................................................................................C-13
C.8 Bluetooth ...............................................................................................................................................C-14
C.9 Remote Control......................................................................................................................................C-15
C.10 TIS-A Displays .......................................................................................................................................C-16
APPENDIX D INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................D-1
APPENDIX E CS-ACNS COMPLIANCE MATRIX .......................................................................................................... E-1
E.1 Elementary Surveillance (ELS)..................................................................................................................... E-1

Rev. 24 Page vii
Table of Contents
E.2 Enhanced Surveillance (EHS)...................................................................................................................... E-8

E.3 ADS-B ..................................................................................................................................................... E-11
APPENDIX F AC 20-165B COMPLIANCE MATRIX ...................................................................................................... F-1

Rev. 24 Page viii
List of Figures
Figure 3-1 Air Data Discrete Priority Order .......................................................................................................... 3-18

Figure 3-2 Pressure Altitude Priority Order .......................................................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3-3 Garmin Label on Remote Units........................................................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-4 GPS Locations of Antennas ................................................................................................................ 3-33
Figure 4-1 Shielded Cable Preparation .................................................................................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-2 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly............................................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-3 Connector and Backshell Assembly ...................................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-4 Configuration Module Installation........................................................................................................ 4-9
Figure 4-5 GAE Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 5-1 Rear Connector Layout - Non-diversity ................................................................................................. 5-1
Figure 5-2 Rear Connector Layout - Diversity ........................................................................................................ 5-1
Figure 6-1 Audio Group ....................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-2 Audio Page .......................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-3 Audio Page 2 ....................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-4 Audio Page 3 ....................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-5 Interface Group ................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-6 RS-232 Interface Page.......................................................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-7 RS-422 Output Page .......................................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-8 A429 In Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-9 A429 Output Page............................................................................................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-10 HSDB Interface Page ........................................................................................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-11 Discrete In Page ............................................................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-12 Discrete Out Page ............................................................................................................................ 6-17
Figure 6-13 Unit Group ...................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6-14 FIS-B Processing Page....................................................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6-15 Altitude and Temperature Units Page............................................................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-16 Installation and VFR ID Page............................................................................................................. 6-19
Figure 6-17 Altitude Alert Deviation and Restore Page ........................................................................................ 6-19
Figure 6-18 Flash Message Indicator Page........................................................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-19 Bluetooth Page ................................................................................................................................ 6-20
Figure 6-20 EHS Page ......................................................................................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-21 TIS-B PROC Page.............................................................................................................................. 6-20
Figure 6-22 Display Group .................................................................................................................................. 6-21
Figure 6-23 Display Backlight and Minimum Level Page ...................................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-24 Keypad Backlight and Minimum Level Page...................................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-25 Photocell Transition, Slope, and Offset Page..................................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-26 Lighting Bus Input Voltage Page....................................................................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-27 Default Backlight and Contrast Offset Page...................................................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-28 Sensor Group .................................................................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-29 Sensor Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-30 Altitude Source Page ....................................................................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-31 Source, Integrity, and Offset Page .................................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-32 Internal Alt Encoder Page................................................................................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-33 Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment Page .............................................................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-34 Setting the Yaw Angle ..................................................................................................................... 6-29
Figure 6-35 Internal AHRS Orientation Page........................................................................................................ 6-29
Figure 6-36 Internal AHRS Calibration Page ........................................................................................................ 6-30
Figure 6-37 ADS-B Group ................................................................................................................................... 6-31
Figure 6-38 Aircraft Category and Max Airspeed Page ........................................................................................ 6-32
Figure 6-39 Aircraft Stall Method and Stall Speed Page....................................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6-40 Aircraft Length and Width Page ....................................................................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-41 1090ES Out Control and UAT Out Remote Control Page.................................................................. 6-33
Figure 6-42 1090ES In Capable and UAT In Capable Page .................................................................................. 6-34
Figure 6-43 ADS-B In Processing Page ................................................................................................................ 6-34

Rev. 24 Page ix
List of Figures
Figure 6-44 Aircraft Tail Number and Address Page ............................................................................................ 6-35
Figure 6-45 Allow Pilot to Edit Flight ID Page ...................................................................................................... 6-35
Figure 6-46 Default Flight ID and Flight ID Prefix Page......................................................................................... 6-35
Figure 6-47 Antenna Group - Diversity Units Only............................................................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-48 Top and Bottom Antenna Cable Loss Page....................................................................................... 6-37
Figure 6-49 Diversity Mode Page ........................................................................................................................ 6-37
Figure 6-50 Diagnostics Group ........................................................................................................................... 6-38
Figure 6-51 Diagnostics Page.............................................................................................................................. 6-39
Figure 6-52 Message Details ............................................................................................................................... 6-39
Figure 6-53 Message Details - Service Soon ........................................................................................................ 6-39
Figure 6-54 Message Details - Altitude Encoder .................................................................................................. 6-39
Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Assembly................................................................................................... B-2
Figure B-2 GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................................................. B-3
Figure B-3 GTX 3X5R GPS Standard Remote Mount Assembly .............................................................................. B-4
Figure B-4 GTX 3X5R GPS Standard Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity......................................... B-5
Figure B-5 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Assembly.......................................................................................... B-6
Figure B-6 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity .................................................... B-7
Figure B-7 GTX 3X5R GPS G1000 Mount Rack Assembly ...................................................................................... B-8
Figure B-8 GTX 3X5R GPS G1000 Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity............................................ B-9
Figure B-9 GTX 3X5 Panel Cutout Detail ............................................................................................................. B-10
Figure B-10 GTX 3X5 Connectors and Vent Locations......................................................................................... B-11
Figure B-11 Backplate, Connector Kit, and Optional Altitude Encoder................................................................. B-11
Figure B-12 GTX 335D/345D Panel Mount Assembly .......................................................................................... B-12
Figure B-13 GTX 335D/345D Panel Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity..................................................... B-13
Figure B-14 GTX 335DR/345DR Standard Remote Mount Assembly.................................................................... B-14
Figure B-15 GTX 335DR/345DR Standard Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity .............................. B-15
Figure B-16 GTX 335DR/345DR Vertical Remote Mount Assembly ...................................................................... B-16
Figure B-17 GTX 335DR/345DR Vertical Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity.............................................. B-17
Figure B-18 GTX 335DR/345DR G1000 Mount Rack Assembly............................................................................ B-18
Figure B-19 GTX 335DR/345DR G1000 Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity ................................. B-19
Figure B-20 GTX 335DR/345DR Hi-Vib Vertical Remote Mount Assembly............................................................ B-20
Figure B-21 GTX 335DR/345DR Hi-Vib Vertical Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity ................................... B-21
Figure B-22 GTX 335DR/345DR Connectors and Vent Locations ......................................................................... B-22
Figure B-23 Backplate, Connector Kit, and Optional Altitude Encoder................................................................. B-22
Figure D-1 GTX 3X5 Power Configuration Typical Interconnect.............................................................................D-3
Figure D-2 GTX 345 - G1000 Interconnect............................................................................................................D-5
Figure D-3 GTX 335 - G1000 Interconnect............................................................................................................D-7
Figure D-4 GTX 335/GTX 345 - GNS 480 (CNX80) Interconnect............................................................................D-8
Figure D-5 GTX 3X5 - GNS 480 (CNX80) Interconnect ..........................................................................................D-8
Figure D-6 GTX 325/335 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect ..............................................................................D-9
Figure D-7 Single/Dual GTX 325/335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ...........................................................D-10
Figure D-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect ...................................................................................D-11
Figure D-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ............................................................................D-13
Figure D-10 GTX 325/335/345 - GDL 88 Interconnect.........................................................................................D-14
Figure D-11 GTX 3X5 - GDL 88 Interconnect ......................................................................................................D-15
Figure D-12 GTX 345 - Traffic Sensor Interconnect .............................................................................................D-16
Figure D-13 GTX 345 - Single and Dual 400W/500W Series Interconnect............................................................D-20
Figure D-14 GTX 3X5 - Audio Interconnect.........................................................................................................D-21
Figure D-15 GTX 3X5 - Radio Altimeter Interconnect ..........................................................................................D-22
Figure D-16 GTX 3X5 - AHRS/Heading Source Interconnect ................................................................................D-23
Figure D-17 GTX 3X5 - Switches and OAT Probe Interconnect ............................................................................D-24
Figure D-18 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Source Interconnect ..........................................................................................D-25
Figure D-19 GTX 325 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect.............................................................................D-26
Figure D-20 GTX 335 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect.............................................................................D-27

Rev. 24 Page x
List of Figures
Figure D-21 GTX 345/345R - Flight Stream Interconnect .....................................................................................D-28

Figure D-22 GTX 345 - MX20/GMX 200 Interconnect.........................................................................................D-29
Figure D-23 GTX 335 - GDU 620 Interconnect....................................................................................................D-29
Figure D-24 Single GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ..................................................................D-30
Figure D-25 Dual GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ....................................................................D-31
Figure D-26 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ............................................................D-33
Figure D-27 GTX 33D ES and GTX 345 - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ....................................................D-35
Figure D-28 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - TPU-66A Traffic Display Interconnect............................................................D-37
Figure D-29 GTX 335/345 - GDU 700( )/1060 Interconnect.................................................................................D-39
Figure D-30 GTX 345D GPS Time Mark Input Interconnect .................................................................................D-40
Figure D-31 GTX 345 - GI 275 Interconnect........................................................................................................D-41
Figure D-32 GTX 345 - GPS 175/GNC 355 Interconnect......................................................................................D-41
Figure D-33 GTX 335 - GPS 175/GNC 355 Interconnect......................................................................................D-41
Figure D-34 GTX 335/345 - GNSS Source Interconnect .......................................................................................D-41

Rev. 24 Page xi
List of Tables
Table 1-1 GTX 3X5 Units ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Table 1-2 Interface Summary ............................................................................................................................... 1-6
Table 1-3 GTX 335 and GTX 345 BDS Registers ................................................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-4 Physical Characteristics - Panel Mount Units ......................................................................................... 1-8
Table 1-5 Physical Characteristics - Remote Mount Units ..................................................................................... 1-9
Table 1-6 Display Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 1-11
Table 1-7 GAE Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 1-11
Table 1-8 Transponder Specifications................................................................................................................. 1-11
Table 1-9 UAT Receiver Specifications................................................................................................................ 1-12
Table 1-10 GTX 345 1090 MHz Receiver Specifications ....................................................................................... 1-12
Table 1-11 GPS Receiver Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-12
Table 1-12 Power Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 1-13
Table 1-13 TSO Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 1-14
Table 1-14 Applicable P/Ns .................................................................................................................................. 1-16
Table 1-15 TSO Deviations................................................................................................................................... 1-17
Table 1-16 Software Design Assurance Levels ...................................................................................................... 1-18
Table 1-17 Complex Hardware Design Assurance Levels ...................................................................................... 1-19
Table 1-18 Equipment Authorization ................................................................................................................... 1-19
Table 1-19 Garmin Reference Documents............................................................................................................ 1-21
Table 1-20 Additional Reference Documents ....................................................................................................... 1-21
Table 3-1 GTX 3X5 Configurations ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2 Accessories Supplied ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
Table 3-3 Pressure Sensor Module ..................................................................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-4 GX000 System Rack........................................................................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-5 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Kits................................................................................................. 3-11
Table 3-6 Standard Rack, Hi-Vib ........................................................................................................................ 3-11
Table 3-7 Vertical Remote Rack, Hi-Vib .............................................................................................................. 3-12
Table 3-8 Backplate Assemblies ......................................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-9 Remote Bluetooth Antenna Kit .......................................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-10 Recommended Crimp Tools ............................................................................................................... 3-14
Table 3-11 Acceptable UAT/1090 Antennas ........................................................................................................ 3-15
Table 3-12 GNSS Receiver Antennas .................................................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-13 Minimum System Configuration......................................................................................................... 3-17
Table 3-14 Compatible ADS-B Traffic/FIS-B Displays ............................................................................................. 3-17
Table 3-15 Air Data Select Source Priority ............................................................................................................ 3-20
Table 3-16 Barometric Vertical Rate Source Priority .............................................................................................. 3-20
Table 3-17 Indicated Airspeed Source Priority ...................................................................................................... 3-20
Table 3-18 True Airspeed Source Priority ............................................................................................................. 3-20
Table 3-19 Barometric Pressure Setting Source Priority......................................................................................... 3-21
Table 3-20 MCP/FCU Selected Altitude Source Priority ......................................................................................... 3-21
Table 3-21 Magnetic Heading Source Priority ...................................................................................................... 3-21
Table 3-22 True Heading Source Priority .............................................................................................................. 3-22
Table 3-23 Static Air Temperature Source Priority ................................................................................................ 3-22
Table 3-24 Total Air Temperature Source Priority ................................................................................................. 3-22
Table 3-25 Pressure Altitude Source Selection #1................................................................................................. 3-22
Table 3-26 Pressure Altitude Source Priority Order #1 .......................................................................................... 3-22
Table 3-27 Pressure Altitude Source Priority Order #2 .......................................................................................... 3-23
Table 3-28 Baro-Corrected Altitude Source Selection #1 ...................................................................................... 3-23
Table 3-29 Baro-Corrected Altitude Source Priority Order #1 ............................................................................... 3-23
Table 3-30 Baro-Corrected Altitude Source Priority Order #2 ............................................................................... 3-23
Table 3-31 AHRS Source Priority .......................................................................................................................... 3-24
Table 3-32 Airport Reference Points Source Priority ............................................................................................. 3-24
Table 3-33 Density Altitude Source Priority .......................................................................................................... 3-24
Table 3-34 Height Above Terrain Source Priority .................................................................................................. 3-25

Rev. 24 Page xii
List of Tables
Table 3-35 Radio Altitude Source Priority ............................................................................................................. 3-25

Table 3-36 Selected Course and Joystick Waypoint Source Priority ....................................................................... 3-25
Table 3-37 FMS Selected Altitude Priority ............................................................................................................ 3-26
Table 3-38 Magnetic Variation Source Priority ..................................................................................................... 3-26
Table 3-39 EHS Roll Angle Source Priority ............................................................................................................ 3-26
Table 3-40 Mach Source Priority .......................................................................................................................... 3-27
Table 3-41 Inertial Vertical Rate Source Priority .................................................................................................... 3-27
Table 3-42 AFCS Modes Source Priority ............................................................................................................... 3-27
Table 3-43 Selected Heading Source Priority ........................................................................................................ 3-27
Table 3-44 ADAHRS HSDB Source Priority............................................................................................................ 3-28
Table 3-45 Flight Control Source Priority.............................................................................................................. 3-28
Table 4-1 Backshell Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Table 4-2 Configuration Module Kit, P/N 011-00979-03...................................................................................... 4-9
Table 5-1 J3251 Connector ................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Table 5-2 J3252 Connector ................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Table 5-3 Power Pins ........................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Table 5-4 Power Configuration and Control Inputs.............................................................................................. 5-6
Table 5-5 Power Configuration and Power Control Functions .............................................................................. 5-6
Table 5-6 Lighting Bus Pins.................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Table 5-7 Altitude Inputs ..................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Table 5-8 Discrete Inputs and Outputs................................................................................................................. 5-8
Table 5-9 RS-232 Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................................. 5-9
Table 5-10 ARINC 429 Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 5-9
Table 5-11 Ethernet Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 5-10
Table 5-12 RS-422 Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 5-10
Table 5-13 External Suppression Bus Pin .............................................................................................................. 5-10
Table 5-14 OAT Input and Output ....................................................................................................................... 5-11
Table 5-15 Audio Inputs and Outputs.................................................................................................................. 5-11
Table 5-16 Time Mark Outputs............................................................................................................................ 5-11
Table 5-17 Configuration Module Inputs and Outputs ......................................................................................... 5-12
Table 5-18 USB Inputs and Outputs..................................................................................................................... 5-12
Table 6-1 RS-232 Channel 1 through Channel 3 Selections ................................................................................. 6-6
Table 6-2 RS-232 Channel 4 Selections................................................................................................................ 6-9
Table 6-3 RS-422 Selections .............................................................................................................................. 6-10
Table 6-4 ARINC 429 Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 6-11
Table 6-5 ARINC 429 Outputs ........................................................................................................................... 6-12
Table 6-6 HSDB Formats.................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Table 6-7 Discrete Inputs ................................................................................................................................... 6-14
Table 6-8 Discrete Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 6-15
Table 6-9 Cable Loss and Delay ......................................................................................................................... 6-37
Table A-1 AHRS Inputs.........................................................................................................................................A-6
Table A-2 ADC Inputs ..........................................................................................................................................A-6
Table A-3 ARINC 743A Inputs..............................................................................................................................A-7
Table A-4 EFIS Air Data ........................................................................................................................................A-8
Table A-5 Flight Control.......................................................................................................................................A-9
Table A-6 Heading.............................................................................................................................................A-10
Table A-7 Flight ID .............................................................................................................................................A-10
Table A-8 Radio Altitude....................................................................................................................................A-10
Table A-9 Traffic Inputs......................................................................................................................................A-11
Table A-10 GPS Data Formats ..............................................................................................................................A-12
Table A-11 Garmin Concentrator Labels ..............................................................................................................A-13
Table A-12 TAS Output Labels .............................................................................................................................A-13
Table A-13 TIS-A Output Labels ...........................................................................................................................A-14
Table A-14 Traffic Labels......................................................................................................................................A-14

Rev. 24 Page xiii
List of Tables
Table A-15 ARINC 735 Traffic Labels....................................................................................................................A-15

Table A-16 BCAS Traffic Labels ............................................................................................................................A-15
Table A-17 GPRMC Sentence Data Format...........................................................................................................A-18
Table A-18 PGRMZ Sentence Data Format ...........................................................................................................A-19
Table A-19 PGRMH Sentence Data Format...........................................................................................................A-19
Table A-20 Geoid Altitude Data Message Format .................................................................................................A-20
Table A-21 Latitude Data Message Data Format...................................................................................................A-20
Table A-22 Longitude Data Message Data Format................................................................................................A-21
Table A-23 Ground Track Data Message Data Format ..........................................................................................A-21
Table A-24 Ground Speed Data Message Data Format .........................................................................................A-21
Table C-1 ADS-B In Displays.................................................................................................................................C-2
Table C-2 GPS Sources.........................................................................................................................................C-4
Table C-3 Altitude Sources...................................................................................................................................C-7
Table C-4 Audio Panels......................................................................................................................................C-10
Table C-5 Radio Altimeters ................................................................................................................................C-10
Table C-6 Heading Reference Sources................................................................................................................C-11
Table C-7 Traffic Sensors ...................................................................................................................................C-13
Table C-8 Bluetooth...........................................................................................................................................C-14
Table C-9 Remote Control .................................................................................................................................C-15
Table C-10 TIS-A Displays ....................................................................................................................................C-16
Table E-1 ELS ...................................................................................................................................................... E-1
Table E-2 EHS...................................................................................................................................................... E-8
Table E-3 ADS-B................................................................................................................................................ E-11
Table F-1 GTX 3X5 ADS-B Position Sources ..........................................................................................................F-1

Rev. 24 Page xiv
System Overview
1 System Overview
1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Equipment Description ................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 ADS-B Capabilities.......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4.1 ADS-B Out................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.4.2 ADS-B In................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4.3 Installation Approval for ADS-B Systems ................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 FIS-B Capabilities ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.6 TIS System Capabilities ................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.7 Interface Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.8 General Specifications .................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.9 Transponder Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.10 UAT Receiver Specifications (GTX 345 Only)................................................................................................ 1-12
1.11 GTX 345 1090 MHz Receiver Specifications ................................................................................................ 1-12
1.12 GPS Specifications (Units with Internal GPS Only)........................................................................................ 1-12
1.13 Power Specifications................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.14 Certification ............................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.14.1 Non-TSO Functions............................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.14.2 Design Assurance Levels ....................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.14.3 Transmitter Grant of Equipment Authorization ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.15 License Requirements ................................................................................................................................. 1-20
1.16 Reference Documents................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.1 Scope
NOTE
Garmin recommends installation of the GTX 3X5 by a Garmin–authorized installer. Garmin will not be
liable for damages that result from improper or negligent installation of the GTX 3X5 to the extent
permitted by law.
Mechanical and electrical information to install the GTX 3X5 into an aircraft is provided in this manual. It is not
equivalent to an approved airframe-specific maintenance manual, installation design drawing, or installation data
package. The content of this manual assumes use by competent and qualified avionics engineering personnel and/or
avionics installation specialist using standard maintenance procedures in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of
Federal Regulation and other related accepted procedures.

Rev. 24 Page 1-1
System Overview
1.2 Equipment Description

The GTX 3X5 models include Mode S/ES transponders. Mode S/ES models have an optional internal GPS/SBAS receiver.
Model names with an R indicate remote mount units that do not include a display or keypad. An X indicates an
included feature, and an O indicates an optional feature.
Table 1-1 GTX 3X5 Units

GTX GTX GTX 335 GTX GTX 335R GTX GTX 345 GTX GTX 345R
Feature
325 335 w/GPS 335R w/GPS 345 w/GPS 345R w/GPS
Panel mount X X X X X
Remote mount X X X X
Diversity [1] O O O O
Pressure sensor module [3] O O O O O O O O O
Night vision goggle compatibility O O O

[1] [2]
ATCRBS Mode A/C X X X X X X X X X
Mode S/ES X X X X X X X X
ARINC 429 data concentrator X X X X X X X X X
ADS-B In with alerting X X X X

(UAT and 1090 MHz)
Connext (via Bluetooth) [4] X X X X
FIS-B X X X X
TIS traffic X X X X
ADS-B In and TAS/TCAS I/TCAS II X X X X

traffic integration
HSDB forwarding X X X X
Flight timers X X X X X
Audio output X X X X X X X X X
Interface to Garmin display X X X X X X X X X

products
Displays pressure altitude,

outside air temperature, and X X X X X
density altitude
Altitude monitor X X X X X
[1] Unit ordered with this option included.

[2] Night vision option is not available on diversity units.
[3] The pressure sensor module is a separate item.
[4] Supports Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) ADS-B software v3.00 and later.

Rev. 24 Page 1-2
System Overview
1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations

Definitions
References to GTX 3X5 apply to all GTX 3X5 models, except when noted.
References to GTX 335 and GTX 345 also applies to remote and diversity models, unless otherwise noted.
References to GTX 3X5(R) refer to both the panel mount and remote mount variation.
References to G1000 apply to G950/G1000 systems running software v15.xx and earlier.
The term squitter refers to a burst or broadcast of aircraft-tracking data that is periodically transmitted by a Mode S
transponder without radar interrogation. The GTX 3X5 Mode S/ES models transmit ADS-B Out ES. These transmissions
contain additional aircraft information that includes GPS based location information.
Abbreviations
These abbreviations and acronyms are used in this document.
AC Advisory Circular
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
ADS-R Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
AFMS Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System
AIRMET Airmen Meteorological Information
API Appliance Project Identifier
ATAS ADS-B Traffic Advisory System
ATCRBS Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System
BDS Comm-B Data Selector
BLE Bluetooth Low Energy
CAVS CDTI Assisted Visual Separation
CDTI Cockpit Display of Traffic Information
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CG Center of Gravity
CONUS Continental United States
CS-ACNS Certification Specification and Acceptable Means of Compliance for Airborne Communication,
Navigation and Surveillance
DC Direct Current
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
ELS Elementary Surveillance
EHS Enhanced Surveillance
EQF Environmental Qualification Form
ES Extended Squitter
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FCU Flight Control Unit
FIS-B Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FMS Flight Manual Supplement
GAE Garmin Altitude Encoder
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS Global Positioning System
GTX Garmin Transponder
HAE Height Above Ellipsoid
HSDB High Speed Data Bus
LAT Latitude
LON Longitude
MCP Mode Control Panel

Rev. 24 Page 1-3
System Overview
METAR Meteorological Aviation Report

MFD Multifunction Display
MSR Message Success Rate
NOTAM Notice to Airmen
NEXRAD Next Generation Radar
OAT Outside Air Temperature
PED Portable Electronic Device
PIREP Pilot Weather Report
POH Pilot Operating Handbook
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RFMS Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
SATCOM Satellite Communications
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System
SFD Secondary Flight Display
SIGMET Significant Meteorological Information
SIL Source Integrity Level
SPI Special Position Indicator
TAF Terminal Area Forecast
TAS Traffic Advisory System
TCAS Traffic Collision Avoidance System
TIS Traffic Information Service
TIS-B Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
TSO Technical Standard Order
UAT Universal Access Transceiver
UHF Ultra-High Frequency
USB Universal Serial Bus
VHF Very High Frequency
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
1.4 ADS-B Capabilities

1.4.1 ADS-B Out
The GTX 335 and GTX 345 include ADS-B Out capabilities when installed with an approved internal or external GPS
position source.
1.4.2 ADS-B In
For all ADS-B In data reception capabilities, the GTX 345 includes receivers for both the 978 MHz (UAT) and the
1090 MHz frequency bands. The GTX 345 receives ADS-B transmissions from other ADS-B Out equipped aircraft,
ADS-R, and TIS-B information from ground stations. ADS-B In information received from these transmissions supply
traffic data to compatible CDTIs.

Rev. 24 Page 1-4
System Overview
1.4.3 Installation Approval for ADS-B Systems

It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure the ADS-B Out system installation is compliant with 14 CFR 91.227 and to
make sure compatibility between the GTX 3X5 and the ADS-B Out position source. For compatible equipment that is
applicable for 14 CFR 91.227-compliant installations in accordance with AC 20-165B refer to Garmin document ADS-B
Out Compatible Equipment.
1.5 FIS-B Capabilities

The GTX 345 receives FIS-B information from ground stations in the United States. A direct line-of-sight between the
ground station and aircraft is necessary to receive FIS-B data. The data may not be available at ground level in some
locations. The GTX 345 supplies data to compatible displays. Depending on the display capability, the following may
display.
• NOTAMs (includes TFRs, Ds, and FDCs)
• AIRMETs
• SIGMETs
• METARs
• TAFs
• PIREPs
• Winds/Temps Aloft
• Regional NEXRAD
• CONUS NEXRAD
• Lightning
• Cloud tops
• Icing
• Turbulence
• CWAs
• G-AIRMETs
1.6 TIS System Capabilities

The GTX 335 supplies information about nearby traffic through the FAA provided radar based TIS. Advisory traffic
information is shown on a compatible Garmin display. Garmin units capable to show TIS traffic include:
• GNS 480 (CNX80)
• GTN 6XX/7XX
• GMX 200
• MX20 MFD
• GNS 400W/500W Series
• GDU 620
• GDU 1040
• GDU 700( )/1060
• GI 275

Rev. 24 Page 1-5
System Overview
1.7 Interface Summary

Table 1-2 Interface Summary
Input/ GTX 335 GTX 345
Interface Description GTX 325
Output Qty Qty
RS-232 I/O 3 3 4
O 1 1 1
ARINC 429
I 2 2 2
HSDB I/O N/A N/A 2
RS-422 O N/A N/A 1
I [3] 15 15 15
Discrete I/O O 1 1 1
I/O [1] 2 2 4
Gray code altitude input [3] I [3] 1 1 1
Suppression bus I/O 1 1 1
1PPS O [4] N/A 1 1
OAT input I 1 1 1
Audio output O 1 1 1
Configuration module, GAE module interface [2] I/O 1 1 1
USB interface I/O 1 1 1
Lighting bus input I 1 1 1
Switched power output O 1 1 1
[1] Can be configured to be either input or output on a per-discrete basis.

[2] Use for either the configuration module or combination configuration module/GAE.
[3] The Gray code altitude input pins can be used for other functions when not used for Gray code.
[4] 1PPS is an output if equipped with an internal GPS.

Rev. 24 Page 1-6
System Overview
Table 1-3 GTX 335 and GTX 345 BDS Registers

Extended Enhanced General Transponder/
BDS Description
Squitter Surveillance Elementary Surveillance
0, 0 Comm-B Broadcasts X
0, 5 Airborne Position Message X
0, 6 Surface Position Message X
0, 7 Extended Squitter Status X
0, 8 Airborne Identification Message X
0, 9 Airborne Velocity Message X
1, 0 Data Link Capability Report X
1, 7 Common Usage GICB Capability Report X
1, 8 MSSS GICB Capability Report (1 of 5) X
1, 9 MSSS GICB Capability Report (2 of 5) X
1, A MSSS GICB Capability Report (3 of 5) X
1, B MSSS GICB Capability Report (4 of 5) X
1, C MSSS GICB Capability Report (5 of 5) X
1, D MSSS MSP Capability X
2, 0 Aircraft Identification X
2, 1 Aircraft Registration X
4, 0 Selected Vertical Intention X
5, 0 Track and Turn Report X
6, 0 Heading and Speed Report X
6, 1 Aircraft Status Message, Subtype 1 X
6, 2 Target State and Status Message X
6, 5 Operational Status Message [1] X
E, 3 Transponder Type/Part Number X
E, 4 Transponder Software Revision Number X
[1] Regardless of diversity or non-diversity operations, the ADS-B single antenna subfield is set to 1. The
single antenna subfield will be set to 1 if both antenna channels cannot be guaranteed to be
functional. The transponder cannot ensure that both channels are functional. Reference DO-260B,
section 2.2.3.2.7.2.4.5.

Rev. 24 Page 1-7
System Overview
1.8 General Specifications

It is the responsibility of the installing agency to obtain the necessary EQF. Forms are available at the
Dealer Resource Center.
Table 1-4 Physical Characteristics - Panel Mount Units

Characteristic Specification
Bezel height 1.65 in. (42 mm)
Bezel width 6.25 in. (159 mm)
Rack height (dimple to dimple) 1.68 in. (43 mm)
Rack width 6.30 in. (160 mm)
Depth behind panel with connectors (measured from face of aircraft
10.07 inches (256 mm)
panel to rear of connector backshells)
GTX 325 weight (unit only) 2.1 lb (0.95 kg)
GTX 325 with rack, backplate, and connectors 2.9 lb (1.32 kg)
GTX 335 with GPS weight (unit only) 2.2 lb (1.00 kg)
GTX 335 with GPS with rack, backplate, and connectors 3.0 lb (1.36 kg)
GTX 335D weight (unit only) 2.3 lb (1.04 kg)
GTX 335D with rack, backplate, and connectors 3.1 lb (1.41. kg)
GTX 345 with GPS weight (unit only) 2.5 lb (1.13 kg)
GTX 345 with GPS with rack, backplate, and connectors 3.4 lb (1.54 kg)
GTX 345D weight (unit only) 2.5 lb (1.13 kg)
GTX 345D with rack, backplate, and connectors 3.5 lb (1.59 kg)
-40°F to 158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Operating temperature range
For additional details, refer to the EQF.
Maximum operating altitude 55,000 feet
Humidity 95% non-condensing
Cooling External cooling not necessary
Maximum days of continuous operation 46 days

Rev. 24 Page 1-8
System Overview
Table 1-5 Physical Characteristics - Remote Mount Units

Height, standard mount 1.7 inches (43 mm)
Width, standard mount 6.3 inches (160 mm)
Length, standard mount (unit, mount, and connector backshells) 9.9 inches (252 mm)
Height, unit and vertical remote mount 6.6 inches (167 mm)
Width, unit and vertical remote mount 1.8 inches (46 mm)
Length, unit and vertical remote mount (unit, mount, and connector backshell(s)) 12.7 inches (321 mm)
GTX 335R weight (unit only) 1.9 lb (0.86 kg)
GTX 335R with GPS weight (unit only) 2.0 lb (0.91 kg)
GTX 335R weight with standard mounting tray, backplate, and connectors 2.7 lb (1.22 kg)
GTX 335R with GPS weight with standard mounting tray, backplate, and
2.8 lb (1.27 kg)
connectors
GTX 335R weight with vertical remote mount, backplate, and connectors 3.1 lb (1.41 kg)
GTX 335R with GPS weight with vertical remote mount, backplate, and
3.3 lb (1.50 kg)
connectors
GTX 335R weight with GX000 remote mount, nut plates, backplate, and
2.7 lb (1.22 kg)
connectors
GTX 335R with GPS weight with GX000 remote mount, nut plates, backplate,
2.9 lb (1.32 kg)
and connectors
GTX 335DR weight (unit only) 2.1 lb (0.95 kg)
GTX 335DR with standard rack, backplate, and connectors 2.9 lb (1.32 kg)
GTX 335DR with vertical remote mount (011-03762-00), backplate, and
3.4 lb (1.54 kg)
connectors
GTX 335DR with GX000 remote mount, nut plates, backplate, and connectors 3.0 lb (1.36 kg)
GTX 335DR with vertical mount (011-04431-01), backplate, connectors 3.5 lb (1.59 kg)
GTX 345R weight (unit only) 2.2 lb (1.00 kg)
GTX 345R with GPS (unit only) 2.3 lb (1.04 kg)
GTX 345R weight with standard mounting tray, backplate, and connectors 3.0 lb (1.36 kg)
GTX 345R with GPS with standard mounting tray, backplate, and connectors 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
GTX 345R weight with vertical remote mount, connector backplate, and
3.5 lb (1.59 kg)
connectors
GTX 345R with GPS weight with vertical remote mount, connector backplate,
3.6 lb (1.63 kg)
and connectors
GTX 345R weight with GX000 remote mount, nut plates, backplate, and
3.1 lb (1.41 kg)
connectors
GTX 345R with GPS weight with GX000 remote mount, nut plates, backplate,
3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
and connectors
GTX 345DR weight (unit only) 2.4 lb (1.09 kg)
GTX 345DR with standard rack, backplate, and connectors 3.3 lb (1.50 kg)
GTX 345DR with vertical remote mount (011-03762-00), backplate, and
3.8 lb (1.72 kg)
connectors
GTX 345DR with GX000 remote mount, nut plates, backplate, and connectors 3.4 lb (1.54 kg)

Rev. 24 Page 1-9
System Overview
GTX 345DR with vertical mount (011-04431-01), backplate, connectors 3.8 lb (1.72 kg)
-49°F to 158°F (-45°C to +70°C)
Operating temperature range For additional details, refer to the
EQF.
Maximum operating altitude 55,000 feet
Humidity 95% non-condensing
Cooling External cooling not necessary

Rev. 24 Page 1-10
System Overview
The GTX 3X5 display is a sunlight readable LCD display.
Table 1-6 Display Specifications

Width: 3.46 inches (87.88 mm)
Display size
Height: 0.843 inches (21.4 mm)
Width: 2.95 inches (74.98 mm)
Active area
Height: 0.486 inches (12.36 mm)
Resolution 200 x 33 pixels
Left: 45°
Right: 45°
Viewing angle
From top: 30°
From bottom: 10°
Table 1-7 GAE Specifications

Dimensions 1.12 x 0.62 x 0.57 inches (28.4 x 15.7 x 14.5 mm)
Weight 0.8 ounces (with mounting hardware and harness)
Operating Temperature -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Altitude 30,000 feet maximum
Voltage Supplied by GTX 3X5 transponder
Current Supplied by GTX 3X5 transponder
Resolution 1 foot
1.9 Transponder Specifications

Table 1-8 Transponder Specifications
Transmitter frequency 1090 MHz ± 1 MHz
125 W min at antenna, with max 2dB cable loss
Transmitter power
250 W nominal at unit
Receiver frequency 1030 MHz + 0.01 MHz
Receiver sensitivity -74 dBm nominal for 90% replies
External suppression input > 10 VDC to suppress
External suppression output > 18 VDC with 300 ohm load, 28 VDC typical with no load

Rev. 24 Page 1-11
System Overview
1.10 UAT Receiver Specifications (GTX 345 Only)

Table 1-9 UAT Receiver Specifications
Frequency 978 MHz + 20 ppm
Modulation Continuous phase FSK, h = 0.6, raised cosine shaping, a = 0.5
Data rate 1.04 Mbps
Sensitivity -96 dBm for 90% MSR
1.11 GTX 345 1090 MHz Receiver Specifications

Table 1-10 GTX 345 1090 MHz Receiver Specifications
Frequency 1090 MHz + 1 MHz
Modulation Binary pulse-position
Data rate 1 Mbps
Sensitivity -81 dBm for 90% MSR
1.12 GPS Specifications (Units with Internal GPS Only)

Table 1-11 GPS Receiver Specifications
Number of channels 15 (12 GPS and 3 GPS/SBAS)
Frequency 1575.42 MHz L1, C/A code
-134.5 dBm GPS
Sensitivity (acquisition, no interference)
-135.5 dBm SBAS
Sensitivity (drop lock) -144 dBm
Dynamic range >20 dB
LAT/LON position accuracy <1.25 meter RMS horizontal, <2 meter vertical, with SBAS
Velocity 1000 knots maximum (above 60,000 ft)
TTFF (Time To First Fix) 1:45 min. typical with current almanac, position, and time
Reacquisition 10 seconds typical
Position update interval 0.2 sec (5 Hz)
1PPS (Pulse Per Second) ± 275 nsec of UTC second
Datum WGS-84
SATCOM compatibility SATCOM compatibility is dependent on antenna selection
Antenna power supply 35 mA typical, 40 mA max at 4.7 VDC

Rev. 24 Page 1-12
System Overview
1.13 Power Specifications

GTX 3X5 units require an input voltage of between 9 VDC and 33 VDC. The maximum input power and current is
based upon maximum reply rates. Input power and current does not include the switched power output.
Table 1-12 Power Specifications

Specification
Unit Characteristic
14 VDC 28 VDC
Power input 7 W typical, 14 W maximum
GTX 325 Input current, typical 0.50 A 0.25 A
Input current, maximum 1.00 A 0.50 A
GTX 335D Input current, typical 0.57 A 0.29 A
GTX 335, GPS Input current, typical 0.72 A 0.36 A
GTX 345D Input current, typical 0.72 A 0.36 A
GTX 345, GPS Input current, typical 1.07 A 0.54 A
KEEP ALIVE input current, typical 65 uA 20 uA
GTX 3X5, GPS [1]
KEEP ALIVE input current, maximum 85 uA 40 uA
[1] KEEP ALIVE input only applies to units that have an internal GPS.

Rev. 24 Page 1-13
System Overview
1.14 Certification
The conditions and tests required for approval of this article are minimum performance standards. Those installing this
article either on or within a specific type or class of aircraft must determine that the aircraft installation conditions are
within the standards which include any accepted integrated functions not specified by the standards. TSO articles and
any accepted integrated function(s) not specified in the standards, must have separate approval for installation in an
aircraft. The article may be installed only according to 14 CFR part 43 or the applicable airworthiness requirements.
This is an incomplete system intended to provide the functions in table 1-13, and when installed according to the
installation manual.
All GTX 3X5 unit functions are design-approved under the TSO. Changes or modifications to any unit that are not
approved can void the compliance to necessary regulations and authorization for continued equipment usage.
The installer must verify that non-Garmin devices to be interfaced meet the installation requirements identified in this
manual to ensure the installed system will comply with the Garmin TSO/ETSO Authorization. Garmin installation
requirements will usually specify that the interfaced device has appropriate TSO/ETSO authorization, and in some
cases, such as for TSO-C144 antennas, may also require that the non-Garmin device meet additional Garmin
specifications.
FIS-B information, including weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR areas, are intended to assist in long- and near-
term planning decision making. The system lacks sufficient resolution and updating capability necessary for aerial
maneuvering associated with immediate decisions.
The Appliance Project Identifier (API) for the GTX 3X5 is GMN-01216. The API is used for project identification with the
FAA. To identify appliance approvals refer to applicable hardware and software part numbers.
Table 1-13 TSO Compliance

Class
GTX GTX GTX GTX GTX
TSO and Function
325 335(R) 345(R) 335D(R) 345D(R)
Level
X TSO-C74d Class A Airborne ATC Transponder Equipment
Automatic Pressure Altitude Reporting Code-

X [2] X [2] X [2] X [2] X [2] TSO-C88b --
Generating Equipment
Class 1
X X Level
2ens [3] Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System/
TSO-C112e Mode Select (ATCRBS/Mode S) Airborne
Class 1 Equipment
X X Level
2dens
Airborne Navigation Sensors Using the Global
TSO-C145d
X [1] X [1] Class B2 Positioning System Augmented by the Satellite
[6]
Based Augmentation System
Airborne Navigation Sensors Using the Global
TSO-C145e
X [1] X [1] [7] Class B2 Positioning System Augmented by the Satellite
Based Augmentation System
Class Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) Automatic
X
A1S Dependent Surveillance – Broadcast (ADS-B)
TSO-C154c
Equipment Operating on Frequency of 978
X Class A1 MHz

Rev. 24 Page 1-14
System Overview
Class
GTX GTX GTX GTX GTX
TSO and Function
325 335(R) 345(R) 335D(R) 345D(R)
Level
TSO-C157a Aircraft Flight Information Services – Broadcast
X [4] Class 1
(FIS-B) Data Link System and Equipment
TSO- Aircraft Flight Information Services – Broadcast

X X Class 1
C157b [5] (FIS-B) Data Link System and Equipment
Class
X
B1S
Class Extended Squitter Automatic Dependent

X Surveillance – Broadcast (ADS-B) and Traffic
TSO- A1S
Information Service – Broadcast (TIS-B)
C166b
X Class B1 Equipment Operating on the Radio Frequency
of 1090 Megahertz (MHz)
X Class A1
Class C1, Avionics Supporting Automatic Dependent

TSO-
X C2, C3, Surveillance – Broadcast (ADS-B) Aircraft
C195a [4]
C5 Surveillance Applications (ASA)
Class C1,
Avionics Supporting Automatic Dependent
TSO- C2, C3,
X X Surveillance – Broadcast (ADS-B) Aircraft
C195b [5] C5, C7,
Surveillance Applications (ASA)
C8, D7
[1] With internal GPS.

[2] With optional GAE module.
[3] For main software v2.05 or earlier, the units are Level 2 els.
[4] For ADS-B software v2.xx.
[5] For ADS-B software v3.00 and later.
[6] For GPS software v6.x and v7.x.
[7] For GPS software v8.2 and later.

Rev. 24 Page 1-15
System Overview
Table 1-14 Applicable P/Ns

Description P/Ns
Main software [1] 006-B1607-0( )
v2.xx ADS-B software [1] 006-B1797-0( )
v3.xx ADS-B software [1] 006-B1797-1( )
006-B1827-0( )
GPS software 006-B1827-1( )
006-B1827-22 through -2( )
Main boot block [1] 006-B1607-BA through -B( )
ADS-B boot block [1] 006-B1797-BA through -B( )
GPS boot block 006-B1827-B( )
Transponder main CLD [2] 006-C0153-22 through -2( )
Diversity main CLD [3] 006-C0184-22 through -2( )
ADS-B CLD 006-C0157-21 through -2( )
Main region list [2] 006-D7109-0( )
Diversity main region list [3] 006-D7402-0( )
Main public key region 006-D7109-K( )
ADS-B public key region 006-D7336-K( )
Main audio 006-D4910-0( )
GPS/GBAS Download Tool 006-B2349-0( )
[1] GTX 3X5D units require main software/boot block v2.50 and later, and ADS-B software/boot block
v3.00 and later.
[2] GTX 3X5 non-diversity units.
[3] GTX 3X5D diversity units.

Rev. 24 Page 1-16
System Overview
Table 1-15 TSO Deviations

TSO Deviation
1. Garmin is granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Type/Class and Date
of Manufacture, Deviation and Software Part Number on the exterior of the unit.
TSO-C88b 2. Garmin is granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160G instead of earlier versions of
RTCA/DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
1. Garmin was granted a deviation from DO-181E to not generate replies to ATCRBS/Mode S All-
TSO-C112e [1] Call interrogations. Processing of ATCRBS-Only All-Call interrogations reflected in the upcoming
DO-181F are implemented.
2. Garmin is granted a deviation from TSO-C145d section 7.a that requires “…provide one copy or
TSO-C145d on-line access to the data in paragraphs…5.f through 5.h of this TSO.”
3. Garmin is granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D Change 1 section 2.1.1.10 to use GPS
antennas that meet Garmin Minimum Performance Specifications (Document No.
004-00287-00).
2. Garmin is granted a deviation from TSO-C145e section 7.a that requires “…provide one copy or
TSO-C145e
on-line access to the data in paragraphs…5.f through 5.h of this TSO.”
3. Garmin is granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229E section 2.1.1.10 to use GPS antennas that
meet Garmin Minimum Performance Specifications (Document No. 004-00287-00).
TSO-C154c
TSO-C157a 2. Garmin is granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A section 3.6.2.3 to use Product File Identifier
in addition to APDU Number when reconstructing a Product File from linked APDUs as specified
by Aerodrome and Airspace FIS-B Product Definitions, v4.00, dated May 2009.
TSO-C157b
2. Garmin is granted a deviation from the TSO-C166b not to process ADS-R as required by
TSO-C166b
RTCA/DO-260B section 2.2.18.
3. Garmin is granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-260B section 2.1.10 to meet the transponder
function requirements of RTCA/DO-181E instead of RTCA/DO-181D.
TSO-C195a
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-317A Section 2.2.2.1.5.1.7 item e to always
consider track angle to be valid when reported as valid by an on-ground tracked target.
TSO-C195b
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-317B Section 2.2.2.1.5.1.6 item e to always
consider track angle to be valid when reported as valid by an on-ground tracked target.
[1] Refer to GTX 3X5 Extended Modes Enablement Guide for applicability.

Rev. 24 Page 1-17
System Overview
1.14.1 Non-TSO Functions

The following are declared non-TSO functions, these non-TSO functions as defined in this manual have been evaluated
with the TSO functions. The design data for these non-TSO functions has been accepted by the FAA when these non-
TSO functions are installed in accordance with the guidance and limitations provided in this manual.
The GTX 3X5 includes the following non-TSO functions.
• TIS-A (GTX 335)
• Wireless data conversion (Bluetooth interface) (GTX 345)
1.14.2 Design Assurance Levels

Table 1-16 Software Design Assurance Levels
DO-178B
System Function
Level
Mode S transponder functionality C
ATCRBS transponder functionality C
TIS-A traffic output to a display C
FIS-B aeronautical and meteorological data output to a display D
Outside air temperature (static) C
Flight timers C
1090ES ADS-B transmission C
1090ES/UAT ADS-B reception B
Correlation of TCAS traffic with ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B traffic B
ADS-B Traffic Advisory System (ATAS) including visual and aural alerts B
CDTI Assisted Visual Separation (CAVS) including aural alerting B
External UAT ADS-B control C
Internal GPS/SBAS B
Pressure sensor module C
Altitude monitor/alerting C
Bluetooth output to Portable Electronic Device (PED) E
HSDB packet forwarding B
A429 data concentrator C

Rev. 24 Page 1-18
System Overview
Table 1-17 Complex Hardware Design Assurance Levels
Function DO-254
Transponder main CLD [2] C
Diversity main CLD [3] C
ADS-B CLD C
GPS receiver B [1]
[1] Developed to DO-178B level B equivalent process.

[2] GTX 3X5 non-diversity units.
[3] GTX 3X5D diversity units.
1.14.3 Transmitter Grant of Equipment Authorization

Table 1-18 Equipment Authorization
Model FCC ID
GTX 325
GTX 335 IPH-02133
GTX 335R
GTX 345 (-00, -20, -40, and -60 units)
IPH-02256
GTX 345R (-00 and -40 units)
GTX 345 (-01, -02, -21, -41, and -61 units)
IPH-0225611
GTX 345R (-01, -02, and -41 units)
GTX 335D
IPH-03253
GTX 335DR
GTX 345D
IPH-0225612
GTX 345DR

Rev. 24 Page 1-19
System Overview
1.15 License Requirements

CAUTION
THE UHF TRANSMITTER IN THIS EQUIPMENT IS GUARANTEED TO MEET FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS
COMMISSION ACCEPTANCE OVER THE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE. MODIFICATIONS NOT
EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY GARMIN COULD INVALIDATE THE LICENSE AND MAKE IT UNLAWFUL TO
OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
NOTE
For non-US installations consult the local spectrum management agency for requirements.
The Telecommunications Act of 1996, effective February 8, 1996, provides the FCC discretion to eliminate radio station
license requirements for aircraft and ships. The GTX 3X5 installation must obey current transmitter licensing
requirements. In the US, to find out the specific details on whether a particular installation is exempt from licensing,
visit the FCC website http://wireless.fcc.gov/aviation.
If an aircraft license is necessary, apply for a license on FCC Form 404, Application for Aircraft Radio Station License.
The FCC also has a fax-on-demand service to supply forms by fax. The GTX 3X5 owner accepts all responsibility for
obtaining the proper licensing before using the transponder.

Rev. 24 Page 1-20
System Overview
1.16 Reference Documents

These documents are additional sources of information to install the GTX 3X5. The technician should read all related
reference materials along with this manual before unit installation. The documents in table 1-19 are found at Garmin’s
Dealer Resource Center.
Table 1-19 Garmin Reference Documents

Document P/N
14 CFR 91.227 ADS-B Out Compatible Equipment 190-01533-00
Antenna Minimum Performance Specification for Garmin’s GPS/WAAS Receiver System 004-00287-00
G1000 System Installation Manual 190-00303-00
GTS 8X0/GPA 65 Installation Manual 190-00587-00
GTS Processor GTS 825/855/8000 Installation Manual 190-00587-50
GTX 3X5 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00752-02
GTX 3X5D Environmental Qualification Form 005-01133-02
GTX 3X5 Mode A/C Lock Enablement Guide 190-01499-21
GTX 3X5 Extended Modes Enablement Guide 190-01499-23
GTX 3X5 Pilot’s Guide 190-01499-00
GTX 3X5 Series Transponder G1000 Pilot’s Guide 190-01499-01
GTX 3X5 Transponder Control Enablement Guide 190-01499-22
GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide 190-01499-30
GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide Version 2 190-01499-33
Table 1-20 Additional Reference Documents

Document P/N
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP 1870
Compatibility and Safety
Application for Aircraft Radio Station License FCC Form 404
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices – Aircraft
FAA AC 43.13-1B
Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices – Aircraft
FAA AC 43.13-2B
Alterations

Rev. 24 Page 1-21
Limitations
2 Limitations
The GTX 3X5 meets the minimum performance and quality control standards that are necessary by the TSOs in
section 1.14. Installation of the GTX 3X5 requires separate approval.

Rev. 24 Page 2-1
Installation Overview
3 Installation Overview
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Unit Configurations ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Accessories Supplied........................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.4 Optional Accessories...................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.1 GAE ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.2 GX000 System Rack ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.3 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount ............................................................................................................ 3-11
3.4.4 Standard Rack, Hi-Vib ............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.4.5 Vertical Remote Rack, Hi-Vib .................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.4.6 Backplate Assemblies.............................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.4.7 Remote Bluetooth Antenna .................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.8 GPS Antenna.......................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5 Necessary Installation Materials and Accessories Not Supplied........................................................................ 3-14
3.6 Necessary Special Tools.................................................................................................................................. 3-14
3.7 Transponder Antenna.................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.8 GPS Antenna Requirements........................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.9 Minimum Systems Configuration................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.10 GTX Input Source Priority............................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.11 ADS-B In Considerations.............................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.11.1 TAS/TCAS I Considerations ................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.11.2 TCAS II Considerations ......................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.12 Bluetooth Considerations ............................................................................................................................ 3-30
3.13 AHRS Considerations................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.14 Field Enablements........................................................................................................................................ 3-31
3.15 GPS/SBAS Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Antenna Considerations .............................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16.1 Transponder Antenna........................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.16.2 GPS Antenna........................................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.17 Electrical Bonding ........................................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.18 Cabling and Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.19 Electrical Bonding Considerations ................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.20 Cooling Requirements and Considerations................................................................................................... 3-34
3.21 Position Source (GPS Equipped Units Only) .................................................................................................. 3-34
3.1 Introduction
Equipment information to install the GTX 3X5 and optional accessories is in this section. Cabling is made by the
installing agency to fit each particular aircraft. Always follow permitted avionics installation procedures as outlined in
AC 43.13-1B and AC 43.13-2B and later FAA approved revisions.

Rev. 24 Page 3-1
3.2 Unit Configurations

Table 3-1 GTX 3X5 Configurations
ADS-B Mount
Model Mount GPS Diversity Unit P/N Unit Only Kit Standard Kit [1]
In Type
GTX 325 Panel 011-02974-00 010-01083-00 010-01083-01
GTX 335 Panel 011-03300-00 010-01214-00 010-01214-01
GTX 335D Panel X 011-04331-00 [2] 010-01773-00 010-01773-01
GTX 335 NV Panel 011-03300-20 010-01214-20 010-01214-21
GTX 335, GPS Panel X 011-03300-40 010-01214-40 010-01214-41
GTX 335, GPS Panel X 011-03300-41 [3] 010-01214-42 010-01214-43
GTX 335R Remote 011-03301-00 010-01215-00 010-01215-01 Standard
GTX 335R Remote 011-03301-00 010-01215-00 010-01215-02 Vertical
GTX 335R Remote 011-03301-00 010-01215-00 010-01215-03 G1000
GTX 335R Remote 011-03301-01 [3] 010-01215-05 010-01215-06
GTX 335R, GPS Remote X 011-03301-40 010-01215-40 010-01215-41 Standard
GTX 335R, GPS Remote X 011-03301-40 010-01215-40 010-01215-42 Vertical
GTX 335R, GPS Remote X 011-03301-40 010-01215-40 010-01215-43 G1000
GTX 335DR Remote X 011-04332-00 [2] 010-01774-00 010-01774-01 Standard
GTX 335DR Remote X 011-04332-00 [2] 010-01774-00 010-01774-02 Vertical
GTX 335DR Remote X 011-04332-00 [2] 010-01774-00 010-01774-03 G1000
GTX 335DR Remote X 011-04332-00 [2] 010-01774-00 010-01774-04 Vertical
GTX 345 Panel X 011-03302-00 010-01216-00 010-01216-01
GTX 345 Panel X 011-03302-01 [2] 010-01216-05 010-01216-06
GTX 345 Panel X 011-03302-02 [4] 010-01216-07 010-01216-08
GTX 345D Panel X X 011-04333-00 [2] 010-01775-00 010-01775-01
GTX 345 NV Panel X 011-03302-20 010-01216-20 010-01216-21
GTX 345 NV Panel X 011-03302-21 [2] 010-01216-25 010-01216-26
GTX 345, GPS Panel X X 011-03302-40 010-01216-40 010-01216-41
GTX 345, GPS Panel X X 011-03302-41 [2] 010-01216-45 010-01216-46
GTX 345 NV, GPS Panel X X 011-03302-60 010-01216-60 010-01216-61
GTX 345 NV, GPS Panel X X 011-03302-61 [2] 010-01216-65 010-01216-66
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-00 010-01217-00 010-01217-01 Standard
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-00 010-01217-00 010-01217-02 Vertical
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-00 010-01217-00 010-01217-03 G1000
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-01 [2] 010-01217-05 010-01217-06 Standard
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-01 [2] 010-01217-05 010-01217-07 Vertical
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-01 [2] 010-01217-05 010-01217-08 G1000
GTX 345R Remote X 011-03303-02 [4] 010-01217-0A 010-01217-0B

Rev. 24 Page 3-2
ADS-B Mount
Model Mount GPS Diversity Unit P/N Unit Only Kit Standard Kit [1]
In Type
GTX 345R, GPS Remote X X 011-03303-40 010-01217-40 010-01217-41 Standard
GTX 345R, GPS Remote X X 011-03303-40 010-01217-40 010-01217-42 Vertical
GTX 345R, GPS Remote X X 011-03303-40 010-01217-40 010-01217-43 G1000
GTX 345R, GPS Remote X X 011-03303-41 [2] 010-01217-45 010-01217-46 Standard
GTX 345R, GPS Remote X X 011-03303-41 [2] 010-01217-45 010-01217-47 Vertical
GTX 345R, GPS Remote X X 011-03303-41 [2] 010-01217-45 010-01217-48 G1000
GTX 345DR Remote X X 011-04334-00 [2] 010-01776-00 010-01776-01 Standard
GTX 345DR Remote X X 011-04334-00 [2] 010-01776-00 010-01776-02 Vertical
GTX 345DR Remote X X 011-04334-00 [2] 010-01776-00 010-01776-03 G1000
GTX 345DR Remote X X 011-04334-00 [2] 010-01776-00 010-01776-04 Vertical
[1] Includes unit, install rack, connector backplate, connector kit, and configuration module (GTX 325
standard kit does not include configuration module).
[2] Requires main software v2.50 or later and ADS-B software v3.00 or later.
[3] Requires main software v2.80 or later and main FPGA v2.80 or later.
[4] Requires main software v2.80 or later, main FPGA v2.80 or later, ADS-B software v3.40 or later, and
ADS-B FPGA v2.60 or later.
3.3 Accessories Supplied

Table 3-2 Accessories Supplied
Unit Kit P/N Item P/N Notes

Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Backplate assembly 011-02976-00
GTX 325 010-01083-01
Connector kit 011-02977-00
Product information kit K00-00598-00
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335 010-01214-01 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Configuration module 011-00979-03
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335NV 010-01214-21 Connector kit 011-02977-00

Rev. 24 Page 3-3

Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335 w/GPS 010-01214-41 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335R, standard mount 010-01215-01 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack, vertical 011-03762-00
GTX 335R, vertical mount 010-01215-02 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
Install rack nut plate 011-00915-01
GTX 335R, G1000 mount 010-01215-03

Rev. 24 Page 3-4

Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335R w/GPS, standard mount 010-01215-41 Connector kit 011-02977-00
GTX 335R w/GPS, vertical mount 010-01215-42 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 335R w/GPS, G1000 mount 010-01215-43
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335D 010-01773-01 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 335DR, standard mount 010-01774-01 Connector kit 011-02977-00
Install rack 011-03762-00
GTX 335DR, vertical mount 010-01774-02 Connector kit 011-02977-00

Rev. 24 Page 3-5

Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 335DR, G1000 mount 010-01774-03
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]

Rev. 24 Page 3-6

Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345R, standard mount 010-01217-0B Connector kit 011-02977-01

Rev. 24 Page 3-7

Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 345R, G1000 mount 010-01217-03
Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 345R, G1000 mount 010-01217-08
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]

Rev. 24 Page 3-8

Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 345R w/GPS, G1000 mount 010-01217-43
Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 345R w/GPS, G1000 mount 010-01217-48
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345 NV 010-01216-21 Connector kit 011-02977-01
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345 NV 010-01216-26 Connector kit 011-02977-01
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345 NV w/GPS 010-01216-61 Connector kit 011-02977-01
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345 NV w/GPS 010-01216-66 Connector kit 011-02977-01

Rev. 24 Page 3-9

Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345D 010-01775-01 Connector kit 011-02977-01
Install rack 115-01771-01 [1]
GTX 345DR, standard mount 010-01776-01 Connector kit 011-02977-01
Install rack, G1000 115-02250-00
GTX 345DR, G1000 mount 010-01776-03
[1] The standard rack, P/N 115-01771-01, is the functional equivalent of P/N 115-01771-00.

Rev. 24 Page 3-10
3.4 Optional Accessories

3.4.1 GAE
The GTX 3X5 uses an optional GAE module as a transponder pressure altitude input. The GAE module directly attaches
to the GTX 3X5 rear backplate and connects to the aircraft static pressure system. The GAE module replaces and
functions the same as the configuration module. When installing the pressure sensor module, use the supplied cable
assembly. Do not lengthen.
Table 3-3 Pressure Sensor Module
Item P/N
Pressure sensor module 011-03080-00
3.4.2 GX000 System Rack

The GTX 3X5 has an optional mount and hardware for GX000 installations.
Table 3-4 GX000 System Rack
Item P/N
GTX 3X5 remote rack, G1000 115-02250-00
G1000 nut plate kit, three-position 011-00915-01
3.4.3 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount

The GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount is available as separate components. The base kit mounts to the aircraft. The shoe
kit mounts to the GTX 3X5.
Table 3-5 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Kits
Item P/N
GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount 011-03762-00
GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount, base kit 011-03762-10
GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount, shoe kit 011-03762-20
3.4.4 Standard Rack, Hi-Vib

This standard rack can be used in place of P/N 115-01771-01 rack. It is functionally equivalent, but meets higher
vibration levels. Refer to EQFs for vibration qualification.
Table 3-6 Standard Rack, Hi-Vib
Item P/N
GTX 3X5 standard rack, hi-vib 115-01771-05

Rev. 24 Page 3-11
3.4.5 Vertical Remote Rack, Hi-Vib

The GTX 3X5D vertical remote mount is available as a kit or as separate components. Refer to the EQFs for vibration
qualification.
Table 3-7 Vertical Remote Rack, Hi-Vib
Item P/N Notes

GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount, hi-vib 011-04431-01 Includes rack and adapter
GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount, hi-vib, rack 011-04321-01 Attaches to aircraft
GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount, hi-vib, rack adapter 011-04324-00 Attaches to the unit
3.4.6 Backplate Assemblies

Table 3-6 lists different backplates and intended mounting type. Some backplates are included in standard kits, while
others are optional depending which coax connectors are included.
Table 3-8 Backplate Assemblies
Mounting Type Antenna Connector

Std GX000 Vert
Backplate P/N Panel Transponder GPS Use in Place of
Remote Remote Remote
011-02976-00 X X X BNC --
011-02976-01 X X X BNC TNC
011-02976-02 X X X TNC -- 011-02976-00
011-02976-10 X BNC --
011-02976-11 X BNC TNC
011-02976-12 X TNC -- 011-02976-10
Diversity Units Transponder Bluetooth
011-04340-00 X X X BNC --
011-04340-01 X X X TNC -- 011-04340-00
011-04340-02 X X X BNC R-SMA
011-04340-03 X X X TNC R-SMA 011-04340-02
011-04340-10 X BNC R-SMA
011-04340-04 X TNC R-SMA
011-04340-11 X TNC R-SMA 011-04340-10

Rev. 24 Page 3-12
3.4.7 Remote Bluetooth Antenna

The GTX 345DR has an optional external Bluetooth antenna kit that includes connectors for assembling cable, using
RG-316 coaxial cable not to exceed 12 feet in length.
Table 3-9 Remote Bluetooth Antenna Kit
Item P/N
Remote Bluetooth antenna kit 011-04148-00
3.4.8 GPS Antenna

A GPS antenna is necessary for the GTX 335 and GTX 345 with the internal GPS option. For information about
antenna selection and part numbers, refer to section 3.8.
GA 35 Antenna
The antenna includes four 8-32 UNC-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws and one O-ring.
If it is necessary to use an antenna doubler refer to the applicable antenna installation data.
Use four #8 washers and four #8 self-locking nuts to attach the antenna. Applicable nut plates can be attached to the
doubler. Torque the four supplied 8-32 stainless steel screws 12-15 in-lbs. Apply torque equally across all mounting
screws to avoid deformation of the mounting area. Use a TNC plug to connect the GPS antenna coax cable.
GA 36 Antenna
The antenna includes four 10-32 UNF-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws and one O-ring.
Attach the antenna with four #10 washers and four #10 self-locking nuts. Applicable nut plates can be attached to the
screws to avoid deformation of the mounting area.
Use a TNC plug to connect the GPS antenna coax cable.
GA 37 Antenna
The antenna includes four 10-32 UNF-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws and one O-ring.
Attach the antenna with four #10 washers and four #10 self-locking nuts. Applicable nut plates can be attached to the
A33W Antenna
The antenna includes four 6-32 UNC-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws and one O-ring.
Attach the antenna with four #6 washers and four self-locking nuts. Applicable nut plates can be attached to the

Rev. 24 Page 3-13
3.5 Necessary Installation Materials and Accessories Not

Supplied
The GTX 3X5 is installed with standard aviation materials. The following items are necessary for installation, but not
supplied.
1. Wire (MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent)
2. Shielded wire (MIL-C-27500 or equivalent)
3. Aircraft grade category 5 Ethernet cable is necessary for installations utilizing the HSDB interfaces
4. Mounting hardware
5. Circuit breaker of applicable rating
6. Tie wraps and/or lacing cord
7. Ring terminals for grounding
8. Coaxial cable (RG-400 or equivalent)
9. BNC connectors for the transponder antenna
10. TNC connectors for the GPS antenna
11. Approved pressure altitude source
3.6 Necessary Special Tools

NOTE
Insertion/extraction tools from ITT Cannon are all plastic. The others are plastic with metal tips.
Some connectors use crimp contacts. Use crimp tools in table 3-10 to make sure reliable crimp contact connections for
the rear D-sub connectors are correct.
Table 3-10 Recommended Crimp Tools
22-28 AWG (P3251, P3252)

Manufacturer Hand Crimping Tool Insertion/Extraction
Positioner
Tool
M81969/14-01
Military PN M22520/2-01 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507-0-0-0 9502-4-0-0 M81969/1-04
000849490
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-739
274-7048-000MIL
91067-1
AMP 601966-1 601966-6
2031838-1
M81969/14-01
Daniels AFM8 K42
M81969/1-04
M81969/14-01
Astro 615717 615725
M81969/1-04

Rev. 24 Page 3-14
3.7 Transponder Antenna

NOTE
For the GTX 345 some types of transponder antennas that utilize thin radiator elements are only
intended for use at 1030 and 1090 MHz. These types of antennas should be evaluated on a model-
by-model basis to determine their suitability for UAT receivers.
The GTX 3X5(R) must have an UHF antenna. The antennas in table 3-11 are approved for use with the
GTX 3X5(R). Other antennas are permitted if they meet these specifications:
• Standard 50 ohm vertically polarized antenna with a VSWR < 1.7:1 at 978 MHz and < 1.5:1 at 1090 MHz
• TSO-C66( ), TSO-C74( ), or TSO-C112( ) antennas that also meet the VSWR specification
Table 3-11 Acceptable UAT/1090 Antennas
Connector
Manufacturer P/N Model/Description Notes
Type
Aero Antenna AT130-16 DME Transponder TNC DC Grounded
CI-100 DME Transponder BNC Open Circuit
CI-100-2 DME Transponder TNC Open Circuit
CI-105 DME Transponder BNC Open Circuit
CI-105-3 DME Transponder BNC Open Circuit
Comant CI-105-16 DME Transponder BNC Open Circuit
CI-110-40-30 DME Transponder C Open Circuit
CI-110-41-30 DME Transponder C DC Grounded
CI-110-60-30 DME Transponder C Open Circuit
CI-110-61-30 DME Transponder C DC Grounded
Dayton-Granger L10-611-( ) L-Band Blade C DC Grounded
590-0052 or
A-40 TNC Open Circuit
013-00219-00
Garmin
590-0051 or
A-41 TNC DC Grounded
013-00174-00

Rev. 24 Page 3-15
3.8 GPS Antenna Requirements

Use an antenna in table 3-12 to get the best performance with the GTX 3X5 with internal GNSS receiver. The antennas
in table 3-12 meet specifications in the document Antenna Minimum Performance Specification for Garmin’s
GPS/WAAS Receiver System.
Table 3-12 GNSS Receiver Antennas
Garmin
Connector
Model/Description Manufacturer P/N Order
Type
Number
Garmin 013-00235-( ) 013-00235-( )
GA 35, GPS/WAAS [1] TNC
Aero Antenna AT575-93G( )-TNCF-000-RG-27-NM N/A
Garmin 013-00244-( ) 013-00244-( )

GA 36, GPS/WAAS TNC
Garmin 013-00245-( ) 013-00245-( )

GA 37, GPS/WAAS/XM TNC
Garmin 013-00261-( ) 013-00261-( )

A33W, WAAS Antenna TNC
GPS/VHF Antenna [2] TNC/BNC Comant CI-2580-200 N/A
GPS/VHF Antenna [2] TNC/BNC Comant CI-2728-200 N/A
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna [3] TNC/TNC/BNC Comant CI-2580-410 N/A
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna [3] TNC/TNC/BNC Comant CI-2728-410 N/A
GPS/WAAS Antenna TNC Comant CI-428-200 N/A
GPS/XM Antenna TNC/TNC Comant CI-428-410 N/A
[1] Same mounting hole pattern as GA 56, except GA 35 has a physically larger footprint.
[2] The GPS antenna connector is a TNC and the VHF connector is BNC.
[3] The GPS antenna connector is a TNC connector, the XM connector is TNC, and the VHF connector is
BNC.

Rev. 24 Page 3-16
3.9 Minimum Systems Configuration

For compatible ADS-B traffic/FIS-B displays refer to table 3-14. GTN 6XX/7XX, GNS 480 (CNX80), and G1000 displays
are compatible control panels. When installing a model in table 3-13, each item marked with an X on the same row is
necessary.
Table 3-13 Minimum System Configuration
External ADS-B Traffic/

Transponder Altitude GPS/SBAS Control Audio
Model GPS/SBAS FIS-B Display or
Antenna Source Antenna Panel Panel
Position Source Traffic Light
GTX 325 X X
GTX 335 X X X
GTX 335R X X X X
GTX 335 w/GPS X X X
GTX 335R w/GPS X X X X
GTX 345 X X X X X
GTX 345R X X X X X X
GTX 345 w/GPS X X X X X
GTX 345R w/GPS X X X X X X
Table 3-14 Compatible ADS-B Traffic/FIS-B Displays
Display FIS-B Source Format ADS-B Traffic Source Format

GTN 6XX/7XX HSDB HSDB
GDU 620 HSDB HSDB
GMX 200 RS-422: MX Format 1 MX Format 1
GNS 400W/500W Series RS-232: GNS ARINC 429: Traffic
G1000 RS-422: MX Format 1 or MX Format 3[1] RS-232: Legacy Traffic
MX20 RS-422: MX Format 2 RS-422 MX Format 2
G1000 NXi HSDB HSDB
GX000 HSDB HSDB
GDU 700( )/1060 HSDB HSDB
GI 275 HSDB HSDB
GPS 175 HSDB HSDB
GNC 355 HSDB HSDB
[1] When using software v2.65 or later, MX Format 3 should be used.

Rev. 24 Page 3-17
3.10 GTX Input Source Priority

The GTX 3X5 accepts data from multiple sources. If multiple sources supply data to the unit, only valid data from the
highest priority source is used. Source priorities are shown from highest to the lowest.
START Applicable Priority Tables

Barometric Vertical Rate
Indicated Airspeed
True Airspeed
Barometric Pressure Setting
MCP/FCU Selected Altitude
Magnetic Heading
Is the Air Data Are the ARINC True Heading
429 Sources Static Air Temp
Select discrete YES YES Total Air Temp
configured? configured as
Roll Angle
EFIS/ADC? Mach
FMS Selected Altitude
AFCS Modes
Selected Heading Table 3-15
NO
Barometric Vertical Rate - Table 3-15

Indicated Airspeed - Table 3-15
True Airspeed - Table 3-15
Barometric Pressure Setting - Table 3-15
MCP/FCU Selected Altitude - Table 3-20
Are the ARINC Magnetic Heading- Table 3-21
429 Sources True Heading - Table 3-22
NO YES Static Air Temp - Table 3-15
configured as
Total Air Temp - Table 3-15
ADC? Roll Angle - Table 3-39
Mach - Table 3-15
FMS Selected Altitude - Table 3-37
AFCS Modes - Table 3-42
Selected Heading - Table 3-43
Barometric Vertical Rate - Table 3-16

NO Indicated Airspeed - Table 3-17
True Airspeed - Table 3-18
Barometric Pressure Setting - Table 3-19
MCP/FCU Selected Altitude - Table 3-20
Magnetic Heading - Table 3-21
True Heading - Table 3-22
Static Air Temp - Table 3-23
Total Air Temp - Table 3-24
Roll Angle - Table 3-39
Mach - Table 3-40
FMS Selected Altitude - Table 3-37
AFCS Modes - Table 3-42
Selected Heading - Table 3-43
Figure 3-1 Air Data Discrete Priority Order

Rev. 24 Page 3-18
START Applicable Priority Tables
Is the
Transponder
Control Format Refer to Transponder Control
YES Enablement Guide
1, 2, or 4
configured?
NO
Is the Altitude
Data Select YES Pressure Altitude Table 3-25
discrete Baro-Corrected Altitude Table 3-28
configured?
NO
Are Altitude
Pressure Altitude Table 3-26
Sources 1 and/or 2 YES Baro-Corrected Altitude Table 3-29
configured?
NO
Is the Air Data

Select discrete YES Baro-Corrected Altitude Table 3-15
configured?
NO
Baro-Corrected Altitude Table 3-30
Figure 3-2 Pressure Altitude Priority Order

Rev. 24 Page 3-19
Table 3-15 Air Data Select Source Priority
Air Data
Source
Select Discrete
Open Configured port 1 ARINC 429 EFIS ADC/ADC input
Ground Configured port 2 ARINC 429 EFIS ADC/ADC input
Table 3-16 Barometric Vertical Rate Source Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 label 212 from an ADC
2 ARINC 429 label 212 from an EFIS/ADC
3 RS-232 from an ADC
4 RS-232 from a remote control panel
5 Refer to table 3-44.
Table 3-17 Indicated Airspeed Source Priority
Priority Source
Table 3-18 True Airspeed Source Priority
Priority Source

Rev. 24 Page 3-20
Table 3-19 Barometric Pressure Setting Source Priority
NOTE
If the Air Data Select discrete input is configured and the source is Air Data or EFIS/Air Data,
Label 235 will have priority over Label 234.
Priority Source
5 ARINC 429 label 235 from an AFCS
Table 3-20 MCP/FCU Selected Altitude Source Priority
Priority Source
Table 3-21 Magnetic Heading Source Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 label 320 from a heading source
2 ARINC 429 label 320 from an AHRS

Rev. 24 Page 3-21
Table 3-22 True Heading Source Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 label 314 from a heading source
Table 3-23 Static Air Temperature Source Priority
Priority Source
Table 3-24 Total Air Temperature Source Priority

Priority Source
6 Outside air temperature sensor if OAT sensor installed and is active
Table 3-25 Pressure Altitude Source Selection #1

Altitude Data
Source
Select Discrete
Open Source specified in altitude source configuration 1
Ground Source specified in altitude source configuration 2
Table 3-26 Pressure Altitude Source Priority Order #1

Priority Source
1 Source specified in altitude source configuration 1

Rev. 24 Page 3-22
Table 3-27 Pressure Altitude Source Priority Order #2

Priority Source Precision
1 ARINC 429 label 203 from an ADC High
2 ARINC 429 label 203 from an EFIS/ADC High
3 RS-232 from an ADC High
4 RS-232 from a 25 ft resolution altitude source High
5 RS-232 from a remote control panel High
6 I2C from a GAE 12 High
7 Refer to table 3-44. High
8 Gray code altitude Low
9 RS-232 from a 100 ft resolution altitude source Low
Table 3-28 Baro-Corrected Altitude Source Selection #1
Altitude Data
Source
Select Discrete
Open Source specified in altitude source configuration 1
Ground Source specified in altitude source configuration 2
Table 3-29 Baro-Corrected Altitude Source Priority Order #1
Priority Source
Table 3-30 Baro-Corrected Altitude Source Priority Order #2
Priority Source

Rev. 24 Page 3-23
Table 3-31 AHRS Source Priority
Priority Source
1 A429 labels 270, 324, 325, 332, 333, and 340 from an AHRS
4 AHRS data from the Internal AHRS
Table 3-32 Airport Reference Points Source Priority
Priority Source
2 HSDB runway information from GTN/GPS 175 #1
3 HSDB runway information from GTN/GPS 175 #2
4 HSDB runway information from a GX000
5 HSDB runway information from G500/600 GDU #1
6 HSDB runway information from G500/600 GDU #2
7 HSDB runway information from GI 275 #1
8 HSDB runway information from GI 275 #2
Table 3-33 Density Altitude Source Priority
NOTE
If density altitude could not be retrieved from an external source, density altitude is calculated based
on current pressure altitude and static air temperature.
Priority Source
4 Internally calculated from pressure altitude and static air temperature

Rev. 24 Page 3-24
Table 3-34 Height Above Terrain Source Priority
Priority Source
2 RS-232 from a GNS
3 HSDB height above terrain from GTN/GPS 175 #1
4 HSDB height above terrain from GTN/GPS 175 #2
5 HSDB height above terrain from a GX000
6 HSDB height above terrain from G500/600 GDU #1
7 HSDB height above terrain from G500/600 GDU #2
8 HSDB height above terrain from GI 275 #1
9 HSDB height above terrain from GI 275 #2
Table 3-35 Radio Altitude Source Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 label 164 from a radar altimeter
4 HSDB radio height from GTN/GPS 175 #1
5 HSDB radio height from GTN/GPS 175 #2
6 HSDB radio height from a GX000
7 HSDB radio height from G500/600 GDU #1
8 HSDB radio height from G500/600 GDU #2
9 Radio height from GI 275 #1
10 Radio height from GI 275 #2
Table 3-36 Selected Course and Joystick Waypoint Source Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 labels 100, 306, and 307 from an EFIS/ADC

Rev. 24 Page 3-25
Table 3-37 FMS Selected Altitude Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 label 107 from a Garmin AFCS
2 ARINC 429 label 107 from a Garmin EFIS
5 HSDB FMS vertical navigation data from G500/600 GDU #1
6 HSDB FMS vertical navigation data from G500/600 GDU #2
7 Vertical navigation data from GI 275 #1
8 Vertical navigation data from GI 275 #2
9 HSDB FMS vertical navigation data from a GMC 605
Table 3-38 Magnetic Variation Source Priority
Priority Source
1 HSDB magnetic variation from a GX000
2 HSDB magnetic variation from G500/600 GDU #1
3 HSDB magnetic variation from GTN/GPS 175 #1
4 HSDB magnetic variation from GTN/GPS 175 #2
5 HSDB magnetic variation from G500/600 GDU #2
6 HSDB magnetic variation from GI 275 #1
7 HSDB magnetic variation from GI 275 #2
8 RS-232 from a GNS
Table 3-39 EHS Roll Angle Source Priority
Priority Source

Rev. 24 Page 3-26
Table 3-40 Mach Source Priority
Priority Source
Table 3-41 Inertial Vertical Rate Source Priority
Priority Source
Table 3-42 AFCS Modes Source Priority
Priority Source
1 ARINC 429 labels 304 and 305 from a Garmin AFCS
2 ARINC 429 labels 271 and 276 from an AFCS
3 ARINC 429 labels 304 and 305 from a Garmin EFIS/ADC
4 ARINC 429 labels 271 and 276 from a Garmin EFIS/ADC
5 RS-232 AFCS modes from a remote control panel
6 HSDB AFCS modes from a GX000
7 HSDB AFCS modes from G500/600 GDU #1
8 HSDB AFCS modes from G500/600 GDU #2
9 HSDB AFCS modes from GI 275 #1
10 HSDB AFCS modes from GI 275 #2
11 HSDB AFCS modes from a GMC 605
12 RS-232 vertical modes from a remote control panel
Table 3-43 Selected Heading Source Priority
Priority Source

Rev. 24 Page 3-27
Table 3-44 ADAHRS HSDB Source Priority
Priority GTX #1 GTX #2

1 Selected flight director [1] Selected flight director [1]
2 Pilot sensor selection Copilot sensor selection
3 Copilot sensor selection Pilot sensor selection
4 #1 sensors #2 sensors
5 #2 sensor #1 sensors
[1] Considered in GX000 installations only.
Table 3-45 Flight Control Source Priority
Priority GTX #1 GTX #2

1 Selected flight director Selected flight director

Rev. 24 Page 3-28
3.11 ADS-B In Considerations

The GTX 345 ADS-B In and FIS-B functionality can be configured independently of the ADS-B Out and transponder
functionality. GX000 systems with supporting loader card software/configuration combined with GTX 345 main
software v2.60 and later and ADS-B software v3.20 and later support HSDB connection to more than one ADS-B In
source and more than one FIS-B source. Older GX000 system releases and other HSDB display units cannot connect to
more than one ADS-B In/FIS-B source. If a GTX 345 is in a system that contains a GDL 88, ADS-B In and FIS-B must be
disabled in the GTX 345.
In dual transponder installations with one or more GTX 345 units, it is recommended that each transponder have a
dedicated transponder antenna, to support ADS-B In and FIS-B functionality when the GTX 345 is in standby. If the
transponders share a single antenna using an antenna switch, ADS-B In and FIS-B functionality will be available only
when the ADS-B In/FIS-B source is connected to the antenna. GX000 systems with supporting loader card software/
configuration and GTX 345 main software v2.60 and later and ADS-B software v3.20 and later support dual GTX 345
units connected to a single antenna such that the active GTX will be the ADS-B In/FIS-B source. Installations that
configure multiple ADS-B in sources with a TAS/TCAS are supported only if the TAS/TCAS interfaces to the GTX and
displays via HSDB (i.e., GTS).
In ADS-B software v3.20 and later and when configured, the GTX 345 supports the output of ADS-B In traffic targets
that do not meet performance requirements for display on certified traffic display systems. When using ADS-B software
v3.30 and later, these traffic targets are always output on Connext Bluetooth (i.e. wireless), while wired interfaces
remain dependent on the NPE PROC configuration setting. These traffic targets are referred to as Non-Performing
Emitters (NPEs) because the ADS-B Out information they transmit (i.e., emit) does not meet the integrity and/or
accuracy requirements for certified cockpit traffic display. Therefore, the GTX 345 NPE capability only supports
installations on uncertified aircraft. Visual alerting and aural alerting for NPE traffic targets are optional based on the
NPE configuration. GTX 345 NPE functionality is configured to disabled by default and must remain disabled for
installations on certified aircraft.
GPS Time Mark input is required for UAT receive antenna selection on GTX 345D units. In G1000 installations and non-
GIFD installations, time mark input should be provided to the GTX 345D from the GPS source configured as GPS source
#1 on the GTX 345D. In G1000 NXi and G2/3/5000 installations, time mark input should be provided to the GTX 345D
from the on-side GIA.
3.11.1 TAS/TCAS I Considerations

When a TAS/TCAS I is installed with a GTX 345, the GTX is responsible for providing combined traffic information to
the display unit(s) and providing combined traffic aural alerting that includes muting of traffic aural alerts at low
altitudes. The GTX suppresses traffic aural alerts if either Height Above Ground (calculated from GPS and a terrain
database) or radio altitude is available and less than 500 feet AGL. When both Height Above Ground and radio altitude
are available, both must be 500 feet or greater for the traffic aural alerts to occur.
3.11.2 TCAS II Considerations

In GX000 installations with supporting loader card software/configuration, the GTX 345 can be installed to provide
ADS-B In functionality in an aircraft with TCAS II. In such installations, the GTX 3000 provides the transponder and
ADS-B out functions and these functions of the GTX 345 are disabled by configuration. The GTX 345 can be
configured for ADS-B In traffic and FIS-B, ADS-B In traffic only, or FIS-B only.
When the GTX 345 is used as a source of traffic in TCAS II installations, the GTX is responsible for providing combined
ADS-B and TCAS II traffic information to the display unit(s). The GTX traffic alerting is disabled when installed with
TCAS II, but other ADS-B In applications, such as CAVS, are still available. The TCAS II is responsible for providing traffic
visual and aural alerting and resolution advisories.

Rev. 24 Page 3-29
3.12 Bluetooth Considerations

GTX 345R
For optimal connectivity with a GTX 345R, the Bluetooth antenna must point towards the passenger area of the
aircraft. This is identifiable by the Garmin label. Due to aircraft obstructions, Bluetooth performance may be limited. To
obtain ideal Bluetooth performance, use a Flight Stream 110/210.
Figure 3-3 Garmin Label on Remote Units
GTX 345DR
If the internal antenna does not give optimal performance, the GTX 345DR has a connector on the back to attach an
external Bluetooth antenna. Refer to section 3.4.7 for more information.
If using the external Bluetooth antenna choose a location to mount the antenna that is within reach of the GTX 345DR
rack using a maximum length of 12 feet of RG-316 coax. Ensure to mount the antenna in a location that is free from
conducting obstructions between the antenna and desired Bluetooth access.
3.13 AHRS Considerations

The GTX 345 includes an internal AHRS and will output attitude data via Connext interfaces, when installed in fixed
wing aircraft. AHRS is supported in rotorcraft running ADS-B software v3.51 and later. The following steps are needed
to configure and adjust the internal AHRS for the installation.
1. Configure the AHRS orientation as described in section 6.8.18 or the GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide.
2. With the GTX installed in the aircraft and the aircraft level, perform the AHRS in-aircraft calibration procedure to
set the level pitch and roll offsets. Refer to section 6.8.19 or the GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide.
3. Optionally, the pitch and roll offsets can be adjusted during level flight via Connext using a PED. This only adds
an adjustment to the calibrated offsets; the offsets must first have been set using the on-ground calibration
procedure described in step 2.
When using GTX 3X5 main software v2.70 and ADS-B software v3.40, or later approved combination, the GTX Install
Tool provides an AHRS Diagnostics/Calibration page. This page is intended to be used rarely and only in the event of
observed attitude failures or inaccuracies during flight. It is used to collect diagnostics while the unit is installed in the
aircraft to determine if a bench calibration could improve performance. It also supports performing the bench
calibration process if needed. Refer to the GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide for use of this page.
NOTE
Perform the in-aircraft calibration procedure (step 2 above) following any change to the orientation
parameters (connectors, vent, or yaw), following the bench calibration procedure, or after reverting to
factory calibration. Attitude data will not be output if the in-aircraft calibration procedure is not
performed.

Rev. 24 Page 3-30
3.14 Field Enablements

Transponder Control and Mode A/C Lock field enablements are available with main software v2.05 and later. For more
information refer to GTX 3X5 Mode A/C Lock Enablement Guide and GTX 3X5 Transponder Control Enablement
Guide.
Extended Modes enablement is available on units running main software v2.60 or later and diversity CLD v2.50
(P/N 006-C0184-25) or later. Extended Modes is currently only supported on diversity units. For more information, refer
to GTX 3X5 Extended Modes Enablement Guide.
3.15 GPS/SBAS Parameters

The GTX 3X5 receives the following information from internal and external GPS receivers.
• Latitude
• Longitude
• Height above ellipsoid
• Horizontal and vertical position accuracy data
• Horizontal position integrity data
• North/south velocity
• East/west velocity
• Up/down velocity
• Ground speed
• Horizontal velocity accuracy
• Ground track
• Geometric vertical rate
• SIL and SIL supplement
• RAIM alarm
• Geoid altitude
• Time
• Date
3.16 Antenna Considerations

Mounting location considerations for the antenna(s) are provided in this section.
3.16.1 Transponder Antenna

Ground planes must be considered for installations on composite aircraft. Conductive wire mesh, radials, or thin
aluminum sheets embedded in the composite material supply the ground plane to maximize the antenna pattern
(gain). This can improve transponder performance.
The antenna mounting must use the aircraft manufacturer’s type certificated antenna location and style. The antenna
must be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions and/or AC 43.12-2A Chapter 3.
Transponder antenna considerations help the installer to select the best location for the antenna. The antenna should:
1. Be attached away from major protrusions, such as engines, nacelles, propellers, and antenna masts.
2. Be as far as practical from landing gear doors, access doors, or other openings that could affect its radiation
pattern.
3. Be vertically attached on the bottom of the aircraft. For diversity configurations, the second antenna must be
attached vertically on the top of the aircraft.
4. Not be attached within three feet of the ADF sense antenna or any other communication antenna.
5. Not be attached within six feet of a DME antenna.
6. Be attached a minimum of three feet from the GTX 3X5 to prevent RF interference.
7. The antenna must be installed at least 20 inches from any transponder, TAS/TCAS, or other L-Band antenna.

Rev. 24 Page 3-31
3.16.2 GPS Antenna

NOTE
When attaching a combination antenna, the recommended distance of two feet or more is not
applicable to the distance between the antenna elements of the combination antenna (ex. GPS and
COM, GPS and XM) provided the combination antenna is TSO authorized and has been tested to
meet Garmin’s minimum performance standards. For approved antennas refer to table 1-12.
If twelve inch spacing is not practical, the maximum center-to-center spacing must be used, but never less than nine
inches. Spacing less than nine inches results in unacceptable antenna pattern degradation.The installation guidelines
meet the intent of AC 20-138A section 16. The greater the deviation from these guidelines, the greater the chance of
decreased signal quality and availability. It is possible that all of the installation guidelines cannot be met. These
guidelines are listed in order of importance to get the best performance. The installer should use best judgment to
balance the installation guidelines.The GPS antenna should:
1. Be installed as near to level as possible with respect to the normal cruise flight attitude of the aircraft.
2. Be installed in a location to minimize the effects of airframe shadowing during typical maneuvers.
3. Be installed a minimum of two feet from any VHF COM antenna or any other antenna which may emit harmonic
interference at the L1 frequency of 1575.42 MHz.
4. Be installed a minimum of two feet from any antennas emitting more than 25 watts.
5. Be installed a minimum of nine inches (center to center) from other antennas, including passive antennas such as
another GPS or XM antenna.
6. Be installed a minimum of three inches from the windscreen.
7. Have a twelve inch center to center spacing between GPS antennas.
The recommended antenna locations are shown in figure 3-4.
An aircraft EMC check can find the source of GPS degradation in the presence of interference signals. If an EMC check
shows unacceptable interference, either insert a GPS notch filter in line with the offending VHF COM or the
(re-radiating) ELT transmitter, or select a different GPS antenna location.

Rev. 24 Page 3-32
ANTENNA MASKED BY VERTICAL FIN,

T-TAIL, OR DORSAL FIN. ANTENNA NOT
MOUNTED LEVEL WITH RESPECT TO
THE NORMAL FLIGHT ATTITUDE.
DISTANCE BETWEEN COM AND GPS ANTENNAS

SHOULD BE GREATER THAN TWO FEET.
GOOD BETTER
GREATER THAN THREE INCHES
OF WINDSCREEN
NORMAL
FLIGHT
ATTITUDE
SIDE VIEW
ANTENNA MUST BE ON
TOP OF AIRCRAFT
CENTER LINE
TOP VIEW
GPS ANTENNA OFFSET

FROM CENTERLINE
WITH TYPICAL DUAL
GPS INSTALLATION
Figure 3-4 GPS Locations of Antennas

Rev. 24 Page 3-33
3.17 Electrical Bonding

Ensure the transponder and GPS antennas are electrically bonded to the aircraft.
3.18 Cabling and Wiring

Use AC 43.13-1B chapter 11, sections 8 through 13 to install wiring. The considerations are:
1. It should not be possible for the cable harness to be exposed to wire chafing.
2. The cable harness should not be located near flight control cables, high capacity electrical lines (e.g., DC electric
motor cables), or fuel lines.
3. Do not put cables near high energy sources (e.g., DC motors, high heat sources).
4. Wiring that must be shielded must be done as shown in appendix D.
5. Shield pigtail lengths must be less than 3.0 inches.
3.19 Electrical Bonding Considerations

Bond electrical equipment, supporting brackets, and racks to the aircraft’s main structure. When surface preparation is
necessary to get an electrical bond refer to SAE ARP 1870 section 5. To measure the resistance of the bond between
the equipment and the adjacent aircraft structure use a calibrated milliohm meter. The bond must have a DC resistance
no more than 2.5 milliohms.
3.20 Cooling Requirements and Considerations

There are no cooling requirements or considerations for the GTX 3X5. The chassis has provisions for a fan, however,
one is not necessary or provided.
3.21 Position Source (GPS Equipped Units Only)

GTX 3X5 units with internal GPS can output position data to other devices.
• GTX 330(D)/33(D) ES
• GDL 88(D)
• GTX 3X5(D)(R)
• GTX 3000
• GMC 605
• G5
• GTR 255
• GNC 255
In main software v2.60 and later, GTX 3X5 w/GPS units can be configured to disable the transponder and ADS-B
functions. This allows a unit to be configured as a position source if needed.

Rev. 24 Page 3-34
Installation Procedure
4 Installation Procedure
4.1 Wire Harness Installation ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Backshell Assembly Parts ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.3 Shielded Cable Preparation............................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.4 Connector and Backshell Assembly................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.5 Configuration Module Installation .................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.6 Coax Cable Installation ................................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.7 Equipment Rack Installation.......................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.7.1 Panel Mount Units................................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.7.2 Standard Remote Mount Units .............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.7.3 Vertical Remote Mount Units ................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.7.4 GX000 Integrated Flight Decks .............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.7.5 GAE Installation..................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.8 Panel and Standard Remote Mount Unit Installation and Removal ................................................................ 4-13
4.9 Vertical Remote Mount Unit Installation and Removal................................................................................... 4-14
4.1 Wire Harness Installation

All electrical connections, except for the antenna(s) and shield grounds, are made through the D-sub connectors on the
rear of the unit. The shield grounds terminate to the connector backshells.
For additional information:
• For rear connector pinout and descriptions of interface connections refer to section 5
• For interconnect diagrams, refer to appendix D
• For special tools, refer to section 3.16
Give sufficient space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and assembles all cables. Cable
lengths are dependent upon the installation.
To install pins into connectors and build a wire harness:
1. Remove 0.17 inches of insulation from wires going to the connectors.
2. Put the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools.
3. Put the pin into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawings in appendix D.
4. Gently pull on the wire to make sure the pin is properly engaged into the connector.
5. Route and attach the cable run from the GTX 3X5 to the other units. Refer to section 3.18.

Rev. 24 Page 4-1
4.2 Backshell Assembly Parts

The GTX 3X5 connector kits include backshell assemblies and ground adapter assemblies. Use the shield block ground
kit to terminate shield grounds to the backshell housing. Garmin part numbers for the D-sub connectors and the
backshell assemblies are in table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Backshell Assembly

Figure 4-2
through Description Garmin P/N Notes
Figure 4-4
1 Backshell (P3251) 125-00084-00 [1]

Backshell (P3252) 125-00081-00
2 Shield block (P3251) 117-00147-01 [2]

Shield block (P3252) 117-00147-00
3 Screw, 4-40 x.250, FLHP100°, SS/P, nylon 211-63234-08 [2]
6 Screw, 4-40x.375, PHP, SS/P, with nylon 211-60234-10 [1]
7 Strain relief (P3251) 115-00499-03 [1]

Strain relief (P3252) 115-00499-00
8 Cover (P3251) 115-00500-03 [1]

Cover (P3252) 115-00500-00
9 Screw, 4-40x.187, FLHP100, SS/P, with nylon 211-63234-06 [1]
10 Connector, D-sub, HD, 62-pin (P3251) 330-00185-62 [3]

Connector, D-sub, HD, 15-pin (P3252) 330-00185-15
11 Multiple conductor shielded cable As necessary [4]
12 Shield terminator As necessary [4] [5]
13 Wire, insulated, 20-22 AWG (3 inches maximum length) As necessary [4] [5]
14 Pin contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [3]
MS25036-149,
15 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, 14-16 AWG MS25036-153, [4] [6]
MS25036-156
16 MS51957-42, [4] [6]

Screw, PHP, 8-32 x .312", stainless or cad plated steel
MS35206-242
17 Split washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) stainless MS35338-137, [4] [6]
or cad-plated steel MS35338-42
18 Flat washer, #8, .032" thick, .174" ID, .375" OD, NAS1149CN832R, [4] [6]
stainless or cad plated steel NAS1149FN832P
19 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00 [4]
[1] Supplied as part of backshell kits, P/N 011-00950-03 (P3251), and P/N 011-00950-00 (P3252). These
are included in the connector kits, P/N 011-02977-( ).
[2] Supplied as part of ground adapter kits P/N 011-01169-01 (P3251) and P/N 011-01169-00 (P3252).
These are included in the connector kits, P/N 011-02977-( ).

Rev. 24 Page 4-2
[3] Supplied as part of GTX connector kit P/N 011-02977-00 (GTX 325 and GTX 335), and
P/N 011-02977-01 (GTX 345).
[4] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[5] Solder sleeve with pre-installed shield drain wire may be used instead of items 12 and 13.
[6] Not a Garmin part number.
4.3 Shielded Cable Preparation

NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains can be used instead of separate shield terminators (12)
and individual wires (13). A preferred solder sleeve is M83519/2-X series with a pre-installed shield
drain.
Prepare all of the shielded cables using one of the methods shown in figure 4-1. For details of the shield termination to
the connector backshell refer to figure 4-2.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (11), strip back a 2.5" maximum length of the jacket to expose the braid.
2. Remove the exposed braid.
3. Carefully score the jacket 1/4" to 5/16" from the end and remove the jacket to leave the braid exposed.
4. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (13) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. Refer to figure 4-1. For
termination techniques refer to AC 43.13-1B.
5. Slide a shield terminator (12) onto the prepared cable assembly (11).
6. Connect the shield wire (13) to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves.
7. Crimp contacts (14) onto the cable wires. Refer to section 4.1.
8. For the remaining shielded cables, repeat steps 1 through 7 as necessary.
9. Install a ring terminal (15) onto the cable shield termination wires (13).
10. Group wires as applicable for the connector. Refer to section 4.4.

Rev. 24 Page 4-3
2.5" MAX
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
Preferred Method
2.5" MAX
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
Alternate Method
Figure 4-1 Shielded Cable Preparation

Rev. 24 Page 4-4
4.4 Connector and Backshell Assembly

CAUTION
DO NOT PLACE THE CONCAVE SIDE OF THE STRAIN RELIEF CLAMP (9) ACROSS THE CABLE BUNDLE.
THE CABLE BUNDLE CAN BE DAMAGED.
NOTE
The configuration module and GAE use the same connector pin locations and cannot be used at the
same time.
NOTE
Each tapped hole on the backshell (1) will only take two ring terminals (15). It is recommended to
terminate a maximum of two wires (13) per ring terminal. This necessitates the use of a ring terminal,
#8, insulated, 14-16 AWG (MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single wire is necessary
for this connector, a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can be used. If more wires
exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is permitted to terminate three wires per ring
terminal.
For this procedure refer to figure 4-2 and figure 4-3.

1. Insert flathead screws (3) through holes on the shield block (2).
2. Attach to the backshell (1).
3. Insert the crimped wire harness contacts (14) in the D-sub connector (10). For the chosen contact location. refer
to appendix D.
4. Install the configuration module or GAE wires into the connector if a configuration module or GAE is used. Refer
to section 4.5.
5. Group wires as applicable for the connector.
6. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape (19) so the backshell strain relief and cast housing touches the
cable bundle.
7. Place the backshell around the connector and wire harness so it rests against the front of the backshell.
8. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief clamp (7) across the cable bundle.
9. Attach with three 4-40 x 0.375" pan head screws (6).
10. Attach configuration module. Refer to section 4.5 and figure 4-4.
11. Attach the cover (8) to the backshell using two screws (9).
12. On the pan head screw(16) place in order:
a. Split washer (17)
b. Flat washer (18)
c. First ring terminal (15)
d. If necessary, second ring terminal
13. Insert the assembled pan head screw (16) into the tapped holes on the shield block (2).

Rev. 24 Page 4-5
'21273/$&(7+(
&21&$9(6,'(2)7+(
675$,15(/,() $&5266
7+(&$%/(%81'/(7+(
&$%/(%81'/(:,//%(
'$0$*(.
) 7
2 $&
*( 17 ;
(' &2
0$
$5
(7
62
&.
'
+,(/
)6
2
1*
11,
*,
%(
$5

$5
$5

$5 $;
0 6('
32 /'
(; +,(
6
$5 $5
$5
$5
Figure 4-2 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly

Rev. 24 Page 4-6
;
'21273/$&(7+(
&21&$9(6,'(2)7+(
;
675$,15(/,() $&5266
7+(&$%/(%81'/(7+(
&$%/(%81'/(:,//%(
'$0$*(

;
;
Figure 4-3 Connector and Backshell Assembly

Rev. 24 Page 4-7
4.5 Configuration Module Installation

NOTE
Installations with an optional GAE module do not require a configuration module.
NOTE
The configuration module stores unit configuration data. This lets the installer remove and replace the
GTX without loss of configuration data. Installation of the module is part of the aircraft harness.
GTX 335 and GTX 345 standard kits include a configuration module, optional with the GTX 325. Garmin recommends
to use the configuration module with these models, but it is not required.
Do not install the configuration module in the connector backshell when the GAE is installed on the connector
backplate. The GAE module has a built-in configuration data storage device and interfaces to the GTX 3X5 through the
same pins as the configuration module.
The GAE wire harness is routed out the back of the backshell and plugged into the GAE when the backplate is
assembled. Refer to section 5.13 and figure B-11.
For this procedure refer to figure 4-4 and figure D-1.
1. Remove 0.17 inches of insulation from the end of each wire (2).
2. Crimp socket contacts (3) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (2).
3. Insert crimped socket contacts (3) and wires (2) into the applicable connector housing location.
Refer to figure D-1.
4. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (2) into the connector on the configuration module (1).
5. Insert configuration module (1) into the backshell recess.
6. Point the connector housing so the inserted four conductor wire harness (2) is on the same side of the backshell
as the configuration module (1).

Rev. 24 Page 4-8
Figure 4-4 Configuration Module Installation
Table 4-2 Configuration Module Kit, P/N 011-00979-03
Figure 4-4 Description Garmin P/N

1 Sub-assembly, potted configuration module, with EEPROM 011-02178-00
2 4-conductor harness 325-00122-00
3 Socket contact, crimp #22D 336-00021-01

Rev. 24 Page 4-9
4.6 Coax Cable Installation
NOTE
Make sure the length is set for the necessary cable loss. Some antennas have minimum cable loss
specifications, that may need a cable longer than the physical run in the aircraft.
To install coaxial cables:

1. Route the cable to the radio rack location keeping in mind the recommendations of section 3.18.
2. Attach the cable in accordance with AC 43.13-1B chapter 11, section 11.
3. Trim the cable to the applicable length.
4. Install the connectors to the cable per the manufacturer’s instructions.
4.7 Equipment Rack Installation

4.7.1 Panel Mount Units
CAUTION
EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN INSTALLING THE RACK IN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL. DEFORMATION OF THE
RACK WILL MAKE IT DIFFICULT TO INSTALL AND REMOVE THE GTX 3X5.
NOTE
If the front lip of the mounting rack is behind the surface of the aircraft panel, the GTX 3X5 connectors
may not fully engage. For more information refer to appendix B.
NOTE
Make sure no screw heads or other obstructions prevent the unit from fully engaging in the rack. For
drawing dimensions necessary to prepare the cutouts for the GTX 3X5 unit, refer to figure B-9. For
drilling the mounting holes, the GTX 3X5 mounting rack may be used as a template.
NOTE
Step 3 can be done before or after the wire harness is installed in the aircraft.
1. Install the rack in a rectangular hole (or gap between units) in the instrument panel, typically in the radio stack.
The lower front lip of the rack should be flush with, or extend slightly beyond, the finished aircraft panel.
2. Use six #6-32 flat head screws and self-locking nuts to install the rack in the aircraft panel. The screws are
inserted from the inside through holes in the sides of the rack.
3. Use provided screws to attach the connector(s) to the backplate.
4. Use two #4-40 flat head screws to attach the GAE to the backplate, if used. Refer to figure B-11.
5. Align the backplate so the backplate screw heads pass through the keyed holes in the back of the rack.
6. Connect the wire harness to the GAE, if used. Refer to figure B-9.
7. Slide the backplate to the left (viewing from the front of the unit) until an audible click is heard.
8. Attach the backplate by tightening the four #4-40 screws.

Rev. 24 Page 4-10
4.7.2 Standard Remote Mount Units

The GTX 3X5 standard remote mount racks can be mounted in any orientation as long as all six mounting screws are
attached to a mounting bracket. Design the mounting bracket(s) for the GTX 3X5 unit with the dimension shown in
figure B-4.
Attach the connectors and optional GAE, if used, to the connector backplate the same way as panel mount units. Refer
to section 4.7.1.
4.7.3 Vertical Remote Mount Units

The GTX 3X5 vertical remote mount base is installed in the vertical orientation with six #10-32 100° flat-head screws
and locking nuts. For mounting hole spacing dimensions refer to figure B-6. To mark or drill the mounting holes, the
base may be used as a template.
To install the vertical mount shoe:
1. Point the wedge-shaped end of the vertical remote mount shoe to the back of the unit.
2. Attach the vertical remote mount shoe to the unit with the four screws provided.
3. Torque screws to 15-16 in-lbs.
4. Attach the connectors and optional GAE, if used, to the connector backplate the same way as panel mount
units. Refer to section 4.7.1.
4.7.4 GX000 Integrated Flight Decks

The GTX 3X5 G1000 rack is mounted to the main system rack with the nutplate kit listed in section 3.4.2. At least eight
screws are required to secure the rack as shown in figure B-7. Refer to G1000 System Installation Manual. Attach the
connectors and optional GAE, if used, to the connector backplate the same way as panel mount units. Refer to
section 4.7.1.
4.7.5 GAE Installation

1. Crimp pin contacts onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness. Strip 0.17" of insulation from each wire
prior to crimping.
2. Insert newly crimped pin contacts and wires into the correct locations in the connector housing.
3. Mount the GAE to the backplate using two countersunk screws as shown in figure 4-5.
4. Torque screws to 8 in-lbs.
5. Plug the four-conductor wire harness into the connector on the GAE. Refer to figure D-1.

Rev. 24 Page 4-11
GARMIN
ALTITUDE
ENCODER
Figure 4-5 GAE Assembly

Rev. 24 Page 4-12
4.8 Panel and Standard Remote Mount Unit Installation and

Removal
CAUTION
THE APPLICATION OF HEX DRIVE TOOL TORQUE MORE THAN 8 IN-LBS CAN DAMAGE THE LOCKING
MECHANISM.
NOTE
When a unit is installed make sure it successfully powers up. For configuration procedures refer to
section 6.
NOTE
Before placing the unit in the rack, in order to make sure the position of the retention mechanism is
correct, it can be necessary to insert the hex drive tool into the access hole and turn the hex drive tool
counterclockwise until it fully stops.
Insertion
1. Slide unit in until it stops, approximately 3/8 inch short of the final position.
2. Insert a 3/32" hex drive tool into the access hole at the bottom of the unit face.
3. Push on the left side of the bezel and turn hex drive tool clockwise and apply 8 in-lbs of torque.
Removal
1. Insert the hex drive tool into the access hole on the unit face.
2. Turn hex drive tool counterclockwise until the hex drive tool stops.
3. Pull the unit from the rack.

Rev. 24 Page 4-13
4.9 Vertical Remote Mount Unit Installation and Removal

NOTE
When a unit is installed make sure it successfully powers up. For configuration procedures refer to
section 6.
NOTE
The connector backplate can be attached/detached before or after the installation/removal of the
GTX 3X5 onto the base. Refer to figure B-5.
Insertion
1. Insert the toe of the GTX 3X5 shoe into the base at an angle.
2. Make sure the unit is fully engaged and in line with the base.
3. Rotate the GTX 3X5 down flat onto the base.
4. Rotate the base locking mechanism up and place the cup over the shoe.
5. Rotate the knob clockwise until tight.
6. Directly attach the connector backplate to the GTX 3X5 with two screws using a 3/32" hex tool.
Removal
1. On the base, pull the knob back.
2. Rotate knob counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the cup off of the shoe.
4. Lift the end of the GTX 3X5 from the base and remove the unit.
5. Detach the connector backplate from the GTX 3X5 with a 3/32" hex tool.

Rev. 24 Page 4-14
Connector Pinout Information
5 Connector Pinout Information

5.1 Connector Layouts ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Main Board Connector - J3251....................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 ADS-B Board Connector - J3252 (GTX 345 Only) ............................................................................................ 5-5
5.4 Power............................................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.1 Power Configuration and Control Inputs ................................................................................................. 5-6
5.5 Lighting Bus ................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.6 Altitude Inputs................................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.6.1 Pressure Sensor Module........................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.6.2 Gray Code Altitude Input......................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.7 Discrete I/O..................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.8 Serial Data Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.8.1 RS-232 .................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.8.2 ARINC 429 .............................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.8.3 HSDB (GTX 345 Only) ............................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.8.4 RS-422 (GTX 345 Only).......................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.9 Suppression Bus ........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.10 OAT Input .................................................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.11 Audio Output ............................................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.12 Time Mark.................................................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.13 Configuration Module ................................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.14 USB Interface.............................................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.1 Connector Layouts
Figure 5-1 Rear Connector Layout - Non-diversity
Figure 5-2 Rear Connector Layout - Diversity

Rev. 24 Page 5-1
5.2 Main Board Connector - J3251
Ext Suppression Bus
Ext Standby Input (6)

Audio Mute Input (9)
Discrete Output (3)
Ext Ident Input (7)
OAT Temp Probe
Pressure Sensor/
Discrete I/O 2 (2)
Discrete I/O 1 (1)
ARINC 429 RX1
ARINC 429 TX
Power Ground
Config Module
Power Input 1
Altitude Gray
Lighting Bus
Code Input
RS-232 #1
RS-232 #2
RS-232 #3
Time Mark
Reserved
USB
21 + H I/O O I/O I/O I D4 C1 B1 A1 T T T B A A I D+ C 1
42
+ L O I I I I C2 B2 A2 R R R B A B O D- D 22
62 + + I I I I C4 B4 A4 B A O V+ V 43
Air / Ground Input (8)
Power Control
Power Input 2
Keep Alive
Power Config
Discrete Input (10)
ARINC 429 RX2
Audio Output
Switched Power Out
VIEW IS LOOKING AT THE BACK

OF THE UNIT
Ground Numbers in ( ) are the discrete I/O numbers.
Table 5-1 J3251 Connector

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE CLOCK I/O
2 USB DATA HI I/O
3 TEMP PROBE IN I
4 TIME MARK A [2] I/O
5 ARINC 429 OUT A O
6 ARINC 429 OUT B O
7 RS-232 OUT 3 O
8 RS-232 OUT 2 O
9 RS-232 OUT 1 O
10 ALTITUDE A1* or CONFIGURABLE* I
11 ALTITUDE B1* or CONFIGURABLE* I
12 ALTITUDE C1* or CONFIGURABLE* I
13 ALTITUDE D4* or CONFIGURABLE* I
14 EXTERNAL STANDBY SELECT* or CONFIGURABLE* I
15 CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 1* I/O
17 XPDR FAIL 1* or CONFIGURABLE* O
18 EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O

Rev. 24 Page 5-2
Pin Pin Name I/O

19 LIGHTING BUS HI I
20 AIRCRAFT GROUND I
21 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 I
22 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
23 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE GND O
24 USB DATA LO I/O
25 TEMP PROBE OUT O
26 TIME MARK B [2] I/O
27 ARINC 429 IN 1A I
28 ARINC 429 IN 1B I
29 RS-232 IN 3 I
30 RS-232 IN 2 I
31 RS-232 IN 1 I
35 RESERVED I
36 EXTERNAL IDENT SELECT* or CONFIGURABLE* I
37 AUDIO INHIBIT 2* or CONFIGURABLE* I
38 POWER CONTROL I
39 SWITCHED POWER OUT O
40 LIGHTING BUS LO I
41 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
43 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE POWER O
44 USB VBUS POWER I
45 USB GND --
46 AUDIO OUT HI O
47 AUDIO OUT LO O
48 ARINC 429 IN 2A I
49 ARINC 429 IN 2B I
50 RS-232 GND 3 --
51 RS-232 GND 2 --

Rev. 24 Page 5-3
Pin Pin Name I/O

52 RS-232 GND 1 --
56 ALTITUDE GROUND O
57 SQUAT SWITCH* or CONFIGURABLE* I
58 AIR DATA SELECT* or CONFIGURABLE* I
59 POWER CONFIG I
60 GPS KEEP ALIVE [1] I
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes the signal is an Active-Low discretes.
[1] GTX 335/345 with internal GPS only.
[2] Output on GTX 335/345 units with internal GPS. Input on diversity units.

Rev. 24 Page 5-4
5.3 ADS-B Board Connector - J3252 (GTX 345 Only)

V IE W IS L O O K IN G A T T H E B A C K
O F T H E U N IT
ETHERNET OUT 2
ETHERNET OUT 1
ETHERNET IN 2
ETHERNET IN 1
RS-232 OUT
1
5 T N N N N
10 R P P P P 6
15 I/O I/O B A 11
Discrete I/O (12)
Discrete I/O (11)
RS-422
G ro u n d
Table 5-2 J3252 Connector

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 ETHERNET OUT 1B O
2 ETHERNET IN 1B I
3 ETHERNET OUT 2B O
4 ETHERNET IN 2B I
5 RS-232 OUT 4 O
6 ETHERNET OUT 1A O
7 ETHERNET IN 1A I
8 ETHERNET OUT 2A O
9 ETHERNET IN 2A I
10 RS-232 IN 4 I
11 RS-422 A O
12 RS-422 B O
15 RS-232 GND 4 --
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes the signal is an Active-Low discretes.

Rev. 24 Page 5-5
5.4 Power
The GTX 3X5 is compatible with 14 VDC and 28 VDC aircraft electrical systems. The AIRCRAFT POWER 2 input is
diode-isolated from AIRCRAFT POWER 1 and is used for connecting to an alternate power source, such as on an
aircraft with two electrical buses.
Table 5-3 Power Pins
Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 P3251 21 I
AIRCRAFT GROUND P3251 20 --
AIRCRAFT GROUND P3251 41 --
SWITCHED POWER OUT P3251 39 O
GPS KEEP ALIVE [1] P3251 60 I
[1] Applicable to the GTX 335 and GTX 345 with internal GPS only.
The SWITCHED POWER OUT pin is a switched power output source, typically used for powering devices such as a
remote altitude encoder module. It is active when the GTX 3X5 power is on, and has a 1 ampere max rating.
On models with built-in GPS/SBAS, the GPS KEEP ALIVE input is optional. Continuous battery input power maintains
the internal GPS clock and decreases initial GPS satellite acquisition time during system power-up.
5.4.1 Power Configuration and Control Inputs

The power control inputs are for remote power on/off and enabling the power auto on feature.
The POWER CONFIG input controls the remote on/off feature. The POWER CONFIG input connects to ground for
remote unit installation. The input is left open for panel mount unit installation.
The POWER CONTROL connection controls the POWER CONTROL input. This is used as a remote power on/off control
or to use the power auto on feature when the avionics master is turned on.
Table 5-4 Power Configuration and Control Inputs
POWER CONFIG P3251 59 I
POWER CONTROL P3251 38 I
Table 5-5 Power Configuration and Power Control Functions

Power Power
Unit Type Description
Config Control
Open Open Panel mount Auto on disabled
Open Ground Panel mount Auto on enabled
Ground Open Remote Power off
Ground Ground Remote Power on

Rev. 24 Page 5-6
5.5 Lighting Bus

The lighting bus input controls the front panel display and keypad brightness of panel mount units using the aircraft
panel lighting bus. The GTX 3X5 can also be configured to adjust the display and keypad brightness for ambient
lighting conditions using an internal photo sensor.
The lighting bus input is configured for 5 VDC, 14 VDC, 28 VDC, or 5 VAC inputs.
Use both the LIGHTING BUS HI and LIGHTING BUS LO inputs to connect the lighting bus input to a
5 VAC bus.
Use the LIGHTING BUS HI input to connect the light bus input to a DC input. The return is the unit ground connection.
LIGHTING BUS LO should be left open.
Table 5-6 Lighting Bus Pins
LIGHTING BUS HI P3251 19 I
LIGHTING BUS LO P3251 40 I
5.6 Altitude Inputs

The GTX 3X5 uses pressure altitude inputs from several different sources:
• Gray code inputs
• RS-232 serial inputs
• ARINC 429 inputs
• The optional GAE module (Garmin P/N 011-03080-00)
• HSDB (GTX 345 only)
For altitude source priorities refer to section 3.10. With the proper encoder, the Mode S transponder transmits altitude
reporting in 25-foot resolution to ground stations and other aircraft. The unit must receive altitude from an applicable
altitude reporting device or from the optional GAE module. A parallel Gray code encoder provides altitude in 100 foot
resolution.
For altitude encoders that supply both a serial interface and the parallel Gray code input, such as the
GAE 43 (P/N 013-00066-00), connect one or the other interfaces, but not both. The serial interface is preferred.
5.6.1 Pressure Sensor Module

The optional GAE module (Garmin P/N 011-03080-00) is used for the GTX 3X5 pressure altitude input. It uses the same
interface as the configuration module and also includes the configuration module functionality.

Rev. 24 Page 5-7
5.6.2 Gray Code Altitude Input

The GTX 3X5 accepts ten Gray code altitude discrete inputs.
The Gray code inputs are pulled down for active, or open for inactive.
The GTX 3X5 includes internal isolation diodes on the Gray code inputs to prevent the unit from pulling the encoder
lines to ground when the transponder is turned off.
Table 5-7 Altitude Inputs
ALTITUDE A1* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 10 I
ALTITUDE B1* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 11 I
ALTITUDE C1* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 12 I
ALTITUDE D4* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 13 I
ALTITUDE GROUND P3251 56 O
5.7 Discrete I/O

Active-Low discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is <3.5 VDC or the resistance to ground
is <375 ohms. These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 6.5-33 VDC or the resistance to ground
is >100 kilohm.
The GTX 3X5 has discrete outputs that are configurable. Each is an open drain output capable of sinking 250 milliamp
when active. For discrete input and output configuration refer to table 6-7 and table 6-8.
Table 5-8 Discrete Inputs and Outputs
EXTERNAL STANDBY SELECT* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 14 I
XPDR FAIL 1* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 17 O
EXTERNAL IDENT SELECT* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 36 I
AUDIO INHIBIT 2* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 37 I
SQUAT SWITCH* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 57 I
AIR DATA SELECT* or CONFIGURABLE* P3251 58 I
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 1* P3251 15 I/O
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 2 * P3251 16 I/O

Rev. 24 Page 5-8
5.8 Serial Data Interfaces

5.8.1 RS-232
The RS-232 outputs are compatible with EIA Standard RS-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ± 5 V when
driving a standard RS-232 load. The RS-232 inputs and outputs can be configured for different functions depending on
the installation. Refer to section 6.5. Pins P3252-5, -10, and -15 are on the GTX 345 only.
Table 5-9 RS-232 Inputs and Outputs
RS-232 OUT 1 P3251 9 O
RS-232 IN 1 P3251 31 I
RS-232 GND 1 P3251 52 O
RS-232 OUT 2 P3251 8 O
RS-232 IN 2 P3251 30 I
RS-232 GND 2 P3251 51 --
RS-232 OUT 3 P3251 7 O
RS-232 IN 3 P3251 29 I
RS-232 GND 3 P3251 50 --
RS-232 OUT 4 P3252 5 O
RS-232 IN 4 P3252 10 I
RS-232 GND 4 P3252 15 O
5.8.2 ARINC 429

The ARINC 429 output conforms to the ARINC 429 electrical specification when loaded with up to five standard ARINC
429 receivers. The ARINC 429 inputs and outputs can be configured for different functions depending on the
installation. Refer to section 6.5.
Table 5-10 ARINC 429 Inputs and Outputs
ARINC 429 OUT A P3251 5 O
ARINC 429 OUT B P3251 6 O
ARINC 429 IN 1A P3251 27 I
ARINC 429 IN 1B P3251 28 I
ARINC 429 IN 2A P3251 48 I
ARINC 429 IN 2B P3251 49 I

Rev. 24 Page 5-9
5.8.3 HSDB (GTX 345 Only)

Table 5-11 Ethernet Inputs and Outputs
ETHERNET OUT 1A P3252 6 O
ETHERNET OUT 1B P3252 1 O
ETHERNET IN 1A P3252 7 I
ETHERNET IN 1B P3252 2 I
ETHERNET OUT 2A P3252 8 O
ETHERNET OUT 2B P3252 3 O
ETHERNET IN 2A P3252 9 I
ETHERNET IN 2B P3252 4 I
5.8.4 RS-422 (GTX 345 Only)

The RS-422 interface conforms to the electrical specifications of EIA standard RS-422.
Table 5-12 RS-422 Outputs
RS-422 A P3252 11 O
RS-422 B P3252 12 O
5.9 Suppression Bus

NOTE
The mutual Suppression I/O Bus is not compliant with the maximum applied DC steady state voltage
of +70V from ARINC 735 Attachment 8. The maximum applied DC steady voltage for the suppression
is +32 V. Under normal operation, the Mutual Suppression I/O signal is pulsed.
The GTX 3X5 Mutual Suppression I/O bus may not be compatible with all models of DME units that have
output only suppression. Known incompatible units include the Bendix/King KN 62, KN 64, and
KNS 80. Incompatible DME units can be damaged by the GTX mutual suppression output. For DME
units that only have output suppression, an in-line diode must be installed between the GTX 3X5
Suppression I/O (cathode) and the output only suppression line.
The EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION is intended for connection to other L-band equipment, such as a DME or UAT. The
output is active whenever the GTX 3X5 transmits. When driven by another source, the GTX 3X5 transponder receiver
and transmitter functions will be suppressed.
The EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION output is driven to > 18 VDC when the GTX 3X5 transmits. An input voltage of > 10 VDC
will suppress the GTX 3X5.
Table 5-13 External Suppression Bus Pin
EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION P3251 18 I/O

Rev. 24 Page 5-10
5.10 OAT Input

The GTX 3X5 includes an OAT input, used for OAT and density altitude displays.
TEMP PROBE IN uses a current sensor type probe, such as the EDMO P/N 655-PROBE or the Davtron
P/N C307PS. The temperature input specification is 1 microamp per degree Kelvin (1uA/°K). Connect the probe positive
wire to pin 25 and negative wire to pin 3. For wire designations refer to the manufacturer’s specifications.
Table 5-14 OAT Input and Output
TEMP PROBE OUT P3251 25 O
TEMP PROBE IN P3251 3 I
5.11 Audio Output

The audio output is used to provide aural alerts. The output is capable of 100 mW into a 500 ohm load.
Table 5-15 Audio Inputs and Outputs
AUDIO OUT HI P3251 46 O
AUDIO OUT LO P3251 47 O
5.12 Time Mark

Table 5-16 Time Mark Outputs
TIME MARK A P3251 4 O
TIME MARK B P3251 26 O
With either a GTX 335 or GTX 345 with internal GPS, the TIME MARK can be used as an output to provide 1PPS to
other equipment in the aircraft. GTX 345D units use TIME MARK as an input to support UAT receive antenna selection.

Rev. 24 Page 5-11
5.13 Configuration Module

The configuration module interface is used for connection to either a configuration module or an optional GAE
module.
The configuration and GAE module kits include a wire harness for connection to the GTX 3X5 D-sub connector.
Connect using The wire colors are shown in table 5-17.
The configuration module stores the specified aircraft installation configuration settings.
The optional GAE module is used to provide the pressure altitude for the transponder. The GAE module also includes
configuration memory function to store the installation configuration. When used, A separate configuration module is
not necessary.
Table 5-17 Configuration Module Inputs and Outputs
Pin Name Color Connector Pin I/O
ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE CLOCK White P3251 1 O
ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE DATA Yellow P3251 22 I/O
ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE POWER Red P3251 43 O
ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE GROUND Black P3251 23 O
5.14 USB Interface

CAUTION
USE THE USB CABLE SHIPPED WITH THE UNIT. DO NOT LENGTHEN OR TIE UP IN BUNDLES WITH OTHER
ELECTRICAL WIRES. POTENTIAL DAMAGE OR INTERFERENCE DUE TO COUPLING WITH OTHER CABLES
WILL OCCUR.
Only use the USB interface for unit configuration, software updates, and service while the aircraft is on the ground. Do
not use during normal operation or when airborne.
Table 5-18 USB Inputs and Outputs
USB DATA HI P3251 2 I/O
USB DATA LO P3251 24 I/O
USB VBUS POWER P3251 44 I
USB GND P3251 45 O

Rev. 24 Page 5-12
Post Installation Configuration & Checkout
6 Post Installation Configuration & Checkout

6.1 System Configuration Overview...................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks ............................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3 Configuration Mode and Settings................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.4 Audio Settings................................................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.4.1 Audio Output .......................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Volume ................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.3 Voice....................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.4 Test Audio............................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.5 Altitude Alrt (Panel Mount Units Only) ..................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.6 Timer Expired Alrt (Panel Mount Units Only) ............................................................................................ 6-5
6.4.7 Traffic Alert (Not Applicable to GTX 325) ................................................................................................. 6-5
6.5 Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.1 RS-232 - Channel 1 through Channel 3 ................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.2 RS-232 - Channel 4 (GTX 345 Only)......................................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.3 RS-422 Output (GTX 345 Only).............................................................................................................. 6-10
6.5.4 A429 In ................................................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.5.5 A429 Output......................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.6 HSDB Interface (GTX 345 Only).............................................................................................................. 6-13
6.5.7 Discrete In ............................................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.5.8 Discrete Out .......................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.6 Unit Settings................................................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.6.1 FIS-B Processing (GTX 345 Only) ............................................................................................................ 6-18
6.6.2 Altitude Units (Panel Mount Units Only) ................................................................................................. 6-19
6.6.3 Temperature Units (Panel Mount Units Only) ......................................................................................... 6-19
6.6.4 Installation ID ........................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.6.5 VFR ID ................................................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.6.6 Altitude Alert Deviation (Panel Mount Units Only) .................................................................................. 6-19
6.6.7 Restore Pages On Power-up (Panel Mount Units Only) ........................................................................... 6-19
6.6.8 Flash Message Indicator (Panel Mount Units Only - Software v2.05 and Later) ....................................... 6-20
6.6.9 Bluetooth (GTX 345 Only)...................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.6.10 Enhanced Surveillance (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ........................................................................... 6-20
6.6.11 TIS-B Processing (GTX 345 Only) .......................................................................................................... 6-20
6.7 Display Pages................................................................................................................................................ 6-21
6.7.1 Display Backlight ................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.7.2 Minimum Level...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.7.3 Keypad Backlight................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.7.4 Minimum Level...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.7.5 Photocell Transition ............................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.7.6 Photocell Slope...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.7.7 Offset.................................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.7.8 Lighting Bus Input Vltg .......................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.7.9 Display and Bezel Key Lighting Slope ..................................................................................................... 6-23
6.7.10 Display and Bezel Key Offset................................................................................................................ 6-23
6.7.11 Default Backlight Offset....................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.7.12 Default Contrast Offset ....................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.8 Sensors......................................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.8.1 OAT Sensor Installed.............................................................................................................................. 6-25
6.8.2 Altitude Source 1................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.8.3 Altitude Source 2................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.8.4 GPS 1 SRC............................................................................................................................................. 6-26
6.8.5 SIL (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ........................................................................................................... 6-26
6.8.6 Lat Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ................................................................................................... 6-26
Rev. 24 Page 6-1
6.8.7 Lon Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) .................................................................................................. 6-26
6.8.8 SDA (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)......................................................................................................... 6-26
6.8.9 GPS 2 SRC............................................................................................................................................. 6-27
6.8.10 SIL (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ......................................................................................................... 6-27
6.8.11 SDA (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)....................................................................................................... 6-27
6.8.12 Lat Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ................................................................................................. 6-27
6.8.13 Lon Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ................................................................................................ 6-27
6.8.14 Internal Alt Encoder Installed ............................................................................................................... 6-27
6.8.15 Ceiling................................................................................................................................................. 6-27
6.8.16 Test Points........................................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.8.17 Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment .......................................................................................................... 6-28
6.8.18 Internal AHRS Orientation (GTX 345 Only) ........................................................................................... 6-29
6.8.19 Internal AHRS Calibration (GTX 345 Only)............................................................................................ 6-30
6.9 ADSB............................................................................................................................................................ 6-31
6.9.1 Acft Catgry............................................................................................................................................ 6-32
6.9.2 Acft Max A/S (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ........................................................................................... 6-32
6.9.3 Acft Stall Method .................................................................................................................................. 6-32
6.9.4 Acft Stall Speed ..................................................................................................................................... 6-32
6.9.5 Aircraft Length (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ........................................................................................ 6-33
6.9.6 Aircraft Width (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ......................................................................................... 6-33
6.9.7 1090ES Out Control (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ................................................................................ 6-33
6.9.8 UAT Out Rmt Control ............................................................................................................................ 6-33
6.9.9 1090ES In Capable (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) .................................................................................. 6-33
6.9.10 UAT In Capable (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ..................................................................................... 6-34
6.9.11 ADS-B In Proc (GTX 345 Only) ............................................................................................................. 6-34
6.9.12 NPE PROC ........................................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.9.13 Aircraft Tail Number ............................................................................................................................ 6-34
6.9.14 Address (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only) ................................................................................................. 6-35
6.9.15 Allow Pilot To Edit Flt ID ...................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.9.16 Default Flt ID ....................................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.9.17 Flight ID Prefix ..................................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.10 Antenna (Diversity Units Only) .................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.10.1 Top Antenna Cable Loss ...................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.10.2 Bottom Antenna Cable Loss ................................................................................................................ 6-37
6.10.3 Diversity Mode .................................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.11 Diagnostics................................................................................................................................................. 6-38
6.11.1 Message Details................................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.12 Remote Unit Configuration......................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.13 Ground Check - GPS Reception Check........................................................................................................ 6-40
6.14 Ground Check - Transponder ..................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.15 Software Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. 6-41
6.1 System Configuration Overview

The required GTX 3X5 configuration and checkout procedures are as follows:
1. Complete the installation checks.
2. Configure the GTX 3X5 for the specified installation.
3. Complete ground checks to make sure it interfaces to external equipment.
For additional checkout procedures, refer to GTX 3X5 Mode A/C Lock Enablement Guide.
For main software v2.50 and later, the GTX 3X5 has data logging capability. Data logging can be enabled or disabled
by using GTX installation tool. Refer to GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide.

Rev. 24 Page 6-2
6.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks

CAUTION
MAKE SURE ALL LIGHTING BUSES ARE TURNED TO THEIR LOWEST ADJUSTMENT BEFORE APPLYING
POWER TO THE UNIT. THE LOWEST ADJUSTMENT PREVENTS DAMAGE TO THE UNIT IF THERE ARE ANY
WIRING ERRORS.
Examine the wire harness to make sure the connection to aircraft systems and avionics equipment is correct before the
unit is energized. Point-to-point continuity must be examined to expose any faults such as shorting to ground or wiring
discrepancies. All faults or discrepancies must be corrected before continuing.
Before and during the installation make sure:
1. All cables are properly attached.
2. Shields are connected to connector shield blocks.
3. Movement of the flight and engine controls through the full range of motion do not touch cabling and control
systems.
4. Wire is installed as described in section 3.18.
Make sure these items are completed after the installation or a continuity check.
1. Power and ground checks.
2. Faults and discrepancies are corrected.
3. Installation rack is correctly attached.
4. Unit is correctly seated in the installation rack.
6.3 Configuration Mode and Settings

NOTE
Screen shots are for illustrative purposes only. They do not imply the shown setting(s) should be used
in any installation.
System and interface settings are shown in configuration mode and are unique to the GTX 3X5 installation. The
configuration settings are stored in internal memory. If connected, the configuration module stores configuration
settings. The optional GAE module operates as a configuration module. In this section, configuration instructions are
for panel mount units. To configure remote units refer to section 6.12.
To enter configuration mode on a panel mount unit, push and hold ENT and apply power.
• Push and hold OFF until the unit powers off to exit configuration mode.
• Push FUNC to cycle through the group pages.
• Push 8 or 9 to scroll up or down on the page without an active field selected.
• Push CRSR to access items on the page.
• Push 8 or 9 to cycle through the selections of an item on the page.
• Push ENT to move within the page with a field highlighted or to accept setting.
• Push CLR to move to previous selection on the page.
• Push FUNC to exit the page.

Rev. 24 Page 6-3
6.4 Audio Settings

Configures the audio output, volume, and alert types.
AUD
AUDIO OUTPUT
VOLUME
VOICE
ALTITUDE ALRT
TIMER EXPIRED ALRT
TRAFFIC ALERT
Figure 6-1 Audio Group
6.4.1 Audio Output

NOTE
The volume setting, voice setting, and test audio capabilities below only apply if audio output is
configured to XPDR. These sections are not applicable if audio output is configured to HSDB.
To use the audio output of the transponder, select XPDR. If installing a GTX 345 in a G1000 NXi or G2/3/5000 system,
select HSDB.
6.4.2 Volume
To raise the volume of the transponder audio, push 8. To lower the volume, push 9. The range is 0 to 100.
6.4.3 Voice
Set the voice type to MALE or FEMALE.

Rev. 24 Page 6-4
6.4.4 Test Audio

The test audio files are used to set the volume level of the transponder. MSG 3 is not applicable to the GTX 325.
Selections are:
• NONE • TONE • MSG 1 • MSG 2 • MSG 3
Figure 6-2 Audio Page
6.4.5 Altitude Alrt (Panel Mount Units Only)

Configures altitude alerting type. Selections are:
• OFF • MESSAGE • MSG W/CHIME
6.4.6 Timer Expired Alrt (Panel Mount Units Only)

Configures timer expired alert type. Selections are:
• OFF • MESSAGE • MSG W/CHIME
Figure 6-3 Audio Page 2

6.4.7 Traffic Alert (Not Applicable to GTX 325)
Configures the traffic alerting type. Selections are:
• OFF • MESSAGE • MSG W/CHIME (GTX 335 ONLY)
Figure 6-4 Audio Page 3

Rev. 24 Page 6-5
6.5 Interfaces
Configures inputs and outputs of RS-232, ARINC 429, discretes, and HSDB interfaces.
INTF
RS-232
RS-422 OUTPUT
A429 IN
A429 OUTPUT
HSDB INTERFACE
DISCRETE
Figure 6-5 Interface Group
6.5.1 RS-232 - Channel 1 through Channel 3

Configures the input and output format for channel 1, channel 2, and channel 3 of RS-232 interfaces. For data format
information refer to appendix A. References made to G1000 apply to G950/G1000 systems running software v15.xx
and earlier.
Table 6-1 RS-232 Channel 1 through Channel 3 Selections
Unit
Input/Output Selection Description Notes
Applicability
Input/Output Off No information is received or transmitted. All
Supports transponder interface to GX000
Input/Output XPDR FMT 1 All
and NXi.
Supports transponder interface and TIS-A
Input/Output XPDR FMT 2 GTX 335 only
traffic to GX000 and NXi.
Receives or transmits necessary ADS-B
Input or Output ADS-B+ FMT 1 All [1]
GPS data at 9600 baud.
Receives or transmits necessary ADS-B
Input or Output ADS-B+ FMT 2 All [1]
GPS data at 38400 baud.
Supports transponder interface to GTN,
Input/Output REMOTE FMT 1 All
GNS 480 (CNX80), and G1000.
Supports transponder interface and TIS
Input/Output REMOTE FMT 2 traffic to GTN, GNS 480 (CNX80), and GTX 335 only
G1000.
Input/Output GDL Supports GDL 88 interface All [2]

Rev. 24 Page 6-6
Unit
Applicability
Supports GNS 400W/500W Series FIS-B
Input/Output GNS weather from the GTX 345. Supplies GPS All
[4] [6]
and HAT data to the GTX.
Supports G3X for ADS-B In traffic and FIS-
Input/Output CONNEXT FMT 1 GTX 345 only
B.
Supports input from a Flight Stream
Input CONNEXT FMT 3 GTX 345 only
110/210.
Supports G3X for ADS-B In traffic and
Input/Output CONNEXT FMT 4 GTX 345 only [10]
FIS-B.
Supports Sandia/Icarus/ACK altitude
Input ALT FMT 1 25ft All
format with 25 ft or lower encoding.
Supports Sandia/Icarus/ACK altitude
Input ALT FMT 1 100ft format with a parallel Gray source or All
100 ft encoding.
Supports Shadin altitude format with 25 ft
or lower encoding.
Supports Shadin altitude format with100
ft encoding.
Input ADC FMT 1 Supports Shadin G/S/Z ADC formats. All
Input/Output LGCY REMOTE 1 Supports transponder interface to G1000. All
Supports NMEA 0183 GPS format from
Input NMEA FMT Aera 500/660/795/796 and GPSMAP 396/ All [7] [8] [9]
496/695/696.
Supports the Aviation GPS input from GTX 325
Input AVIATION FMT [7] [8] [9]
GNS 400/500 series. GTX 335
Supports transponder interface and TIS-A
Input/Output LGCY REMOTE 2 GTX 335 only
traffic to G1000.
Transmits pressure altitude in 1 to 100 ft
Output ALT FMT 1 resolution depending on the source of the All
data.
Supports GMX 200 with an RS-232 to RS-
Output MX FMT 1 GTX 345 only [7] [11] [13]
422 converter.
Supports FIS-B to G1000 (RS-232 to RS-
Output MX FMT 3 422 converter needed if interfacing to a GTX 345 only [11] [12]
GIA RS-422/485 input).
Transmits TIS-A traffic for non-certified
Output TIS-A OUT FMT displays: GPSMAP 396/496/695/696, GTX 335 only
G3X, G300.
Supports GDL 90 traffic interface to
Output LGCY TRAFFIC GTX 345 only [11]
G1000.
Output MAPMX Supports Garmin AHRS units. All [1] [3]

Rev. 24 Page 6-7
Unit
Applicability
Provides internal GPS data to the GTR or
Output AVIATION FMT 2 All [1] [5]
GNC.
[1] Output available only on GTX 335 with GPS and GTX 345 with GPS.
[2] Not supported by GDL 88 software v3.34 and earlier.
[3] Available in software v2.10 and later.
[4] Available in all software versions for GTX 345. Available in software v2.11 and later for
GTX 325 and GTX 335.
[5] Available only in software v2.12 and later.
[6] This interface does not supply traffic data. Traffic data to the GNS is supported over ARINC 429.
[8] This GPS data is not AC 20-165B compliant.
[9] GPS HAE is not available for ADS-B out on the GTX 335 when using this GPS source interface.
[11] Configuration of this output on multiple serial output channels is not supported.
[12] Available in software v2.65 and later.
[13] When using software v2.65 or later, MX FMT 3 should be used instead of MX FMT 1 for providing
FIS-B to G1000.

Rev. 24 Page 6-8
6.5.2 RS-232 - Channel 4 (GTX 345 Only)

Configures the input and output format for channel 4 of RS-232 interfaces. For data format information, refer to
appendix A.
Table 6-2 RS-232 Channel 4 Selections

Input/Output OFF Information is not received or transmitted.
Supports GNS 400W/500W Series FIS-B. Supplies GPS and HAT
Input/Output GNS [1]
information to the GTX.
Input/Output CONNEXT FMT 1 Supports G3X for ADS-B In traffic and FIS-B.
Input CONNEXT FMT 3 Supports input from Flight Stream 110/210.
Input/Output CONNEXT FMT 4 Supports G3X for ADS-B In traffic and FIS-B. [2]
Input/Output TRAFFIC FMT 4 Supports Ryan TCAD.
Output MX FMT 1 Supports GMX 200 with an RS-232 to RS-422 converter. [3] [5]
Supports FIS-B to G1000 (RS-232 to RS-422 converter needed if
Output MX FMT 3 [4] [5]
interfacing to a GIA RS-422/485 input).
Output LGCY TRAFFIC Supports GDL 90 enhanced traffic interface to G1000. [5]
[1] This interface does not supply traffic data. Traffic data to the GNS is supported over ARINC 429.
Figure 6-6 RS-232 Interface Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-9
6.5.3 RS-422 Output (GTX 345 Only)

Configures the output format for the RS-422 interface.
Table 6-3 RS-422 Selections
Channel Input/Output Selection Description Notes

OFF Information is not transmitted.
CONNEXT FMT 3 Supports output to Flight Stream 210.
MX FMT 1 Supports GMX 200 and FIS-B to G1000. [3] [4]
RS-422 Output MX FMT 2 Supports MX20.
MX FMT 3 Supports FIS-B to G1000. [2] [3]
Supports third-party display of ADS-B In
OPT LGCY ADSB [1]
information.
[1] Supported with software v2.05 and later.

[2] Supported with software v2.65 and later.
[4] When using software v2.65 or later, MX FMT 3 should be used instead of MX FMT 1 for providing
FIS-B to G1000.
Figure 6-7 RS-422 Output Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-10
6.5.4 A429 In
Reference appendix A for packet details.
Table 6-4 ARINC 429 Inputs
Channel/Speed Format Description Notes

OFF Information is not received.
Receives heading, roll, pitch, and yaw information
AHRS
from systems with AHRS.
Receives altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate
ADC
information from air data systems.
ARINC 743A Receives GPS information from ARINC 743A.
Receives altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, and
EFIS AIR DATA
heading information from EFIS and ADC systems.
Receives MCP/FCU selected altitude, selected
heading, barometric setting, non-standard AFCS
FLIGHT CONTROL modes and FMS selected altitude, and non-standard
CH1/CH2 pitch/roll discrete data for Bendix King
High/Low KFC 225/275/325.
HEADING Receives heading information.
FLIGHT ID Allows the flight ID controller to change the flight ID.
RADIO ALTITUDE Receives radar altitude information.
Receives traffic information from Garmin GTS 800,
TRAFFIC 1 [1]
GTS 820, and GTS 850 systems.
Receives traffic information from L-3 Comm SKY497
TRAFFIC 2 [1]
Skywatch and SKY899 Skywatch HP.
Receives traffic information from Honeywell
TRAFFIC 5 KTA 870 (KTA 810), KTA 970 (KTA 910), KMH 880 [1]
(KMH 820), KMH 980 (KMH 920), and TPU-66A.
[1] Applicable to GTX 345 only.
Figure 6-8 A429 In Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-11
6.5.5 A429 Output

Reference appendix A for packet details.
Table 6-5 ARINC 429 Outputs
Format Description Notes

OFF Information is not transmitted.
FORMAT 2 Garmin concentrator
FORMAT 4 Garmin TAS and GPS data [1]
FORMAT 5 Garmin concentrator, Garmin TAS, and GPS data [1]
FORMAT 8 Garmin TIS-A [2]
FORMAT 9 Garmin concentrator and Garmin TIS-A [2]
TRAFFIC ADS-B traffic output for GNS 400W/500W Series units [3]
Combined TAS/TCAS/ADS-B Traffic output for ARINC 735A
A735 [3] [4] [5]
compatible displays.
Combined TAS/TCAS/ADS-B Traffic output for BCAS
BCAS [3] [4] [5]
compatible displays.
[1] Supported by the GTX 335/345 only.

[2] Supported by the GTX 335 only.
[3] Supported by the GTX 345 only.
[4] A TAS/TCAS system is required for these outputs to function.
[5] Only available in software v2.50 and later.
Figure 6-9 A429 Output Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-12
6.5.6 HSDB Interface (GTX 345 Only)

Configures the presence of specified HSDB devices interfaced to the GTX 345. Selections are YES, NO.
Table 6-6 HSDB Formats
Interface Description
G500/G600 Controls HSDB communication with:
• G500/600 GDU
NAVIGATOR
• GTN 6XX/7XX
GTS • GTS 8X5
• GX000
GX000
• GMC 605
GMC 605 • GPS 175
• GI 275
SFD • GNC 355
Figure 6-10 HSDB Interface Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-13
6.5.7 Discrete In
For pinout information, refer to section 5.
NOTE
The source priority is based upon the selections made during configuration. Refer to section 3.10.
Table 6-7 Discrete Inputs
Function Selection Description

The audio output will be muted until the discrete is opened. This is
AUD MUTE All discrete inputs
connected to a higher priority audio such as TAWS.
Off When this discrete is grounded by a momentary switch, audio alerts are
AUD CNCL
P3251-37 canceled.
Off When this discrete is grounded by a momentary switch, the SPI
IDENT
P3251-36 activates.
When this discrete is grounded, the unit will go into standby mode.
Off
STANDBY Ensure standby select is not configured if a transponder control format
P3251-14
(remote or transponder formats) is used to control the transponder.
This input determines the on-ground status of the aircraft. It is active
Off
SQUAT low, and a ground on this input can be configured to mean On Ground
P3251-57
or In Air.
Switches between two ARINC 429 ADC sources or two EFIS ADC
Off sources. Source 1 and 2 are set during configuration. Source 1 is used
AIR DATA
P3251-58 when the discrete is open and Source 2 is used when the discrete is
grounded.
ALT DATA All discrete inputs Selects between two pressure altitude sources.
All discrete inputs Selects the system ID and overrides configuration setting. GTX 1 system
ID SLCT on main board ID is selected when this discrete is open. GTX 2 system ID is selected
(P3251) when the discrete is grounded.
All Traffic Audio output will be muted until the discrete is opened. This
TRFC MUTE [1] All discrete inputs is connected to a higher priority audio such as TAWS. Does not mute
timers or altitude alert messages.
When this discrete is grounded by a momentary switch, traffic audio
alerts are canceled. Does not cancel timers or altitude alert messages.
GTX 345 ADS-B

TRFC CNCL [1] All discrete inputs If the discrete is grounded while there is no traffic alert condition, the
GTX will annunciate "Traffic Clear" when the discrete is opened. If the
discrete is grounded while there are active traffic alert conditions but no
active traffic audio alerts, an updated traffic audio alert will be
annunciated for the highest priority alert when the discrete is opened.
When this discrete is grounded the GTX simulates a functional
DEMO MODE [1] All discrete inputs
transponder while not transmitting.
Activates all ten Gillham/Gray code inputs. If set to OFF, the input pins
GILLHAM On, Off
are available for configuration to other discrete input functions.
TIS-A When this discrete is momentarily grounded, TIS-A will toggle between
All discrete inputs
(GTX 335 Only) operate/standby.

Rev. 24 Page 6-14
Function Selection Description

The GTX will aurally annunciate "Autopilot Off" when this discrete
transitions to active. This input can be configured to provide an
annunciation when either grounded or open. If the AP OFF 2 discrete is
AP OFF 1 [2] All discrete inputs
already active when this discrete transitions to active, a second alert will
not annunciate. This aural alert will interrupt any currently playing
messages (except test messages).
The GTX will aurally annunciate "Autopilot Off" when this discrete
transitions to active. This input can be configured to provide an
annunciation when either grounded or open. If the AP OFF 1 discrete is
AP OFF 2 [2] All discrete inputs
already active when this discrete transitions to active, a second alert will
not annunciate. This aural alert will interrupt any currently playing
messages (except test messages).
Figure 6-11 Discrete In Page
6.5.8 Discrete Out

Table 6-8 Discrete Outputs
Function Pin Selection Description Notes

Off When this discrete is grounded, it indicates a
ALT ALERT
All discrete outputs on P3251 or P3252 deviation from the preset altitude setting.
Off Failure of transponder causes discrete to
FAIL 1
P3251-17 ground.
Off
FAIL 2 Failure of transponder causes discrete to open.
All discrete outputs on P3251 or P3252
Discrete alternates between open and ground
Off
RPLY ACTV when the transponder is replying to
interrogations.

Rev. 24 Page 6-15

All Units
If the unit needs service soon, this discrete will
switch between open and ground for the first
30 seconds after power up.
GTX 335/345
If after 30 seconds, there is no detection of
pressure altitude or ADS-B In/Out failures the
discrete opens. The discrete will ground if any
pressure altitude or ADS-B In/Out failures are
detected after 30 seconds. Failures related to
ADS-B output are instead reported by the
ADS-B Out Function Fail discrete if configured.
Off
EQUIP STS Pressure altitude failures are instead reported [2]
by the Altitude Valid discrete if configured.
GTX 325
If there is no detection of pressure altitude
failures after 30 seconds, the discrete opens.
The discrete will ground if any pressure
altitude failures are detected after 30 seconds.
Pressure altitude failures are instead reported
by the Altitude Valid discrete if configured. If
the Altitude Valid discrete is configured, the
equipment status discrete will only provide the
service soon indication (first 30 seconds after
power up).
Commands TAS/TCAS standby/operate.
Off Discrete output operation automatically sets
TRFC STBY
All discrete outputs on P3251 or P3252 through TAS/TCAS input configuration.
GTX 345 only.
Off Commands TAS/TCAS into test mode.
TRFC TEST
All discrete outputs on P3251 or P3252 GTX 345 only.
When a traffic alert is active, this discrete will
ground. GTX 345 only. The discrete will not
Off ground when ADS-B In is configured for
TRFC ALRT
All discrete outputs on P3251 or P3252 enabled with TCAS II. It should not be used in
these installations. This discrete output is not
activated by a CAVS Minimum Range alert.
Supports automatic control and integration
Off
TCAD SL with Ryan TCAD and Avidyne TAS600 Series
traffic systems. GTX 345 only.
Off Discrete grounds when transponder is not in
XPDR ACTV [1]
All discretes outputs on P3251 standby.
Discrete activates when ADS-B Out is enabled,
the transponder is not in SBY mode, and the
Off
ADS-B OUT unit does not have a valid GPS position (GTX [1] [2]
335 and GTX 345 only). The active state can
be configured as either ground or open.
Off Discrete grounds when the transponder is the
SBY ALERT [3]
All discrete outputs on P3251 or P3252 selected transponder and is in standby.

Rev. 24 Page 6-16

Discrete activates when pressure altitude is
valid, Standby Mode is inactive, and Altitude
Mode is active. The active state can be
Off
ALT VLD configured as either ground or open. When [4]
configured, pressure altitude failures are
reported by this discrete instead of the
Equipment Status Alert discrete.
[1] Available in system software v2.10 and later.

[2] Some failure/warning indications that affect this discrete output state are suppressed for a duration
after power up. For example, the position input warning is suppressed for 3 minutes and the pressure
altitude warning is suppressed for 5 minutes. These suppressions do not occur if the unit is in
configuration mode.
Figure 6-12 Discrete Out Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-17
6.6 Unit Settings

UNIT
FIS-B PROCESSING
ALTITUDE UNITS
TEMPERATURE UNITS
INSTALLATION ID
VFR ID
ALTITUDE
ALERT DEVIATION
RESTORE PAGES ON
POWER-UP
FLASH MESSAGE
INDICATOR
BLUETOOTH
EHS
TIS-B PROC
Figure 6-13 Unit Group
6.6.1 FIS-B Processing (GTX 345 Only)

To receive FIS-B data, select ENABLED.
NOTE
When enabling FIS-B Processing, ADS-B In Processing must not be disabled. The FIS-B Processing setting
has no affect if ADS-B In Processing is disabled.
Figure 6-14 FIS-B Processing Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-18
6.6.2 Altitude Units (Panel Mount Units Only)

Configures pressure and density altitude units. Selections are:
• FLIGHT LVL • FEET • METERS
6.6.3 Temperature Units (Panel Mount Units Only)

Configures temperature display units. Selections are:
• CELSIUS • FAHRENHEIT
Figure 6-15 Altitude and Temperature Units Page

6.6.4 Installation ID
NOTE
The Installation ID Select discrete overwrites the configuration setting.
Selects the ID number for the transponder. Set the Installation ID to 1 in single installations. Set the primary
transponder Installation ID to 1, and the secondary transponder to 2 in dual installations.
6.6.5 VFR ID
Configures the VFR squawk code for your country. Range in octal is 0000-7777.
Figure 6-16 Installation and VFR ID Page

6.6.6 Altitude Alert Deviation (Panel Mount Units Only)
This field determines the amount of altitude difference from selected altitude to generate an altitude alert. Range is
150 ft to 999 ft.
6.6.7 Restore Pages On Power-up (Panel Mount Units Only)

To save the selected pages set in normal operating mode as the new default page settings next time the unit is power
up, select YES.
Figure 6-17 Altitude Alert Deviation and Restore Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-19
6.6.8 Flash Message Indicator (Panel Mount Units Only - Software v2.05 and
Later)
To have “MSG” flash when a new alert occurs, select YES. If No is selected, the MSG indicator is visible when an alert
is active but does not flash.
Figure 6-18 Flash Message Indicator Page
6.6.9 Bluetooth (GTX 345 Only)

To transmit information to a PED using Bluetooth, select ENABLED.
Figure 6-19 Bluetooth Page
6.6.10 Enhanced Surveillance (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Enhanced surveillance provides additional data available for interrogation by ground stations. To enable replies with
additional data, select ENABLED.
Figure 6-20 EHS Page
6.6.11 TIS-B Processing (GTX 345 Only)

Select ENABLED to enable processing of airborne TIS-B targets. To disable processing airborne TIS-B targets on aircraft
equipped with TAS/TCAS, select GND TRFC ONLY. Ground TIS-B targets will be processed regardless of this
configuration setting. Select ENABLED if no TAS/TCAS is configured.
Figure 6-21 TIS-B PROC Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-20
6.7 Display Pages

NOTE
Make sure the brightness levels match the lighting levels of other equipment in the panel under night
conditions.
DISP
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
MINIMUM LEVEL
KEYPAD BACKLIGHT
MINIMUM LEVEL
PHOTOCELL
TRANSITION
SLOPE
OFFSET
LIGHTING BUS INPUT

VLTG
SLOPE
OFFSET
DEFAULT BACKLIGHT
OFFSET
DEFAULT CONTRAST
OFFSET
Figure 6-22 Display Group

6.7.1 Display Backlight
Configures the source for the display backlight control and adjustment. Select PHOTOCELL if the lighting level uses
ambient lighting. Select LIGHTING BUS if an input from the lighting bus is used to dim the display.

Rev. 24 Page 6-21
6.7.2 Minimum Level

Configures the minimum brightness of the display. The range is 0 to 100. The higher the number, the brighter the
minimum brightness.
Figure 6-23 Display Backlight and Minimum Level Page
6.7.3 Keypad Backlight

Configures the source for the keypad backlight control and adjustment. Select PHOTOCELL if the lighting level uses
ambient lighting. Select LIGHTING BUS if an input from the lighting bus is used to dim the keypad.
6.7.4 Minimum Level

Configures the minimum brightness of the keypad. The range is 0 to 100. The higher the number, the brighter the
minimum brightness.
Figure 6-24 Keypad Backlight and Minimum Level Page
6.7.5 Photocell Transition

Configures a point on the lighting bus. When the lighting bus is below this point, the GTX 3X5 uses the photocell to
adjust the display brightness. The range is 5 to 50.
6.7.6 Photocell Slope

Configures the sensitivity of the photocell input level. Adjusting the slope higher results in a greater display brightness
change for a given increase in the photocell input level. The range is 0 to 100.
6.7.7 Offset
Adjusts the lighting level up or down for any given photocell input level. This field has a range of 0 to 100. Use the
offset setting to match lighting curves with other equipment in the panel.
Figure 6-25 Photocell Transition, Slope, and Offset Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-22
6.7.8 Lighting Bus Input Vltg

Configures the voltage of the lighting bus source. Selections are:
• 14 VDC • 28 VDC • 5 VDC • 5 VAC
Figure 6-26 Lighting Bus Input Voltage Page
6.7.9 Display and Bezel Key Lighting Slope

Configures the sensitivity of the display or bezel keys for any given lighting bus input level. Set the slope higher for a
brighter display for a given increase in the lighting bus input level. This field has a range of 0 to 100.
6.7.10 Display and Bezel Key Offset

Configures the lighting level up or down for any given lighting bus input level. This field has a range of 0 to 100. Use
the offset setting to match lighting curves with other equipment in the panel.
6.7.11 Default Backlight Offset

Manually configures the default backlight offset value from -10 to 99.
6.7.12 Default Contrast Offset

Manually configures the default contrast offset value from -50 to 50.
Figure 6-27 Default Backlight and Contrast Offset Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-23
6.8 Sensors
SNSR
OAT SENSOR
INSTALLED
ALTITUDE SOURCE 1
ALTITUDE SOURCE 2
GPS 1
LAT OFST
LON OFST
SIL
SDA
GPS 2
LAT OFST
LON OFST
SIL
SDA
INTERNAL ALT
ENCODER
INSTALLED
INTERNAL ALT
ENCODER
ADJUSTMENT
INTERNAL AHRS
ORIENTATION
INTERNAL AHRS
CALIBRATION
Figure 6-28 Sensor Group

Rev. 24 Page 6-24
6.8.1 OAT Sensor Installed

Select YES if an OAT sensor is installed.
Figure 6-29 Sensor Page
6.8.2 Altitude Source 1

NOTE
Altitude sources do not need to be set. The GTX 3X5 uses both altitude sources if set. The GTX uses
any altitude source in priority order if no altitude sources are selected. Refer to section 3.10.
Configures the primary altitude source. Selections are:

• NONE • RS232 1 • RS232 2 • RS232 3
• A429 1 • A429 2 • HSDB (GTX 345 only) • GILLHAM
• ALT ENC
6.8.3 Altitude Source 2

Configures the secondary altitude source. Selections are:
• NONE • RS232 1 • RS232 2 • RS232 3
• A429 1 • A429 2 • HSDB (GTX 345 only) • GILLHAM
• ALT ENC
Figure 6-30 Altitude Source Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-25
6.8.4 GPS 1 SRC

NOTE
NAV 1, NAV 2, GIA 1, and GIA 2 are applicable to GTX 345 only.
NOTE
Lateral offset settings are determined from the perspective of the pilot. Right is positive and left is
negative.
NOTE
When configuring the GPS source from a panel mount display, the following statements apply.
• When the GPS source is configured to an AC 20-165B compliant interface, the source design assurance level
is set to level B.
• When the GPS source is configured to the NMEA FMT or AVIATION FMT interface, the source design
assurance level is configurable.
NOTE
The GTX ADS-B out function transmits an SDA that is the lesser of the unit design assurance level
(Level C) and the selected GPS source design assurance level.
Configures the primary GPS source. Selections are:

• NONE • INTRNL • RS232 1 • RS232 2
• RS232 3 • RS232 4 (GTX 345 Only) • A429 1 • A429 2
• NAV 1 • NAV 2 • GIA 1 • GIA 2
6.8.5 SIL (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the integrity for the primary GPS. Choose the setting for the GPS. All certified Garmin GPS sources are
1E-7. Selections are:
• UNK • IE-3 • IE-5 • IE-7
• AUTO (Garmin GPS only)
6.8.6 Lat Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the distance from the antenna and the centerline of the aircraft in meters. Selections are:
• UNK • -6 mt • -4 mt • -2 mt
• 0 mt • 2 mt • 4 mt • 6 mt
6.8.7 Lon Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the distance of the GPS antenna from the nose of the aircraft in meters. Selections are:
• UNK • 2 mt to 60 mt in 2 mt increments
6.8.8 SDA (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the design assurance for GPS 1 Src. Selections are:
• UNK • D • C • B

Rev. 24 Page 6-26
6.8.9 GPS 2 SRC

Configures the secondary GPS source. Selections are:
• NONE • INTRNL • RS232 1 • RS232 2
• RS232 3 • RS232 4 • A429 1 • A429 2
• NAV 1 • NAV 2 • GIA 1 • GIA 2
6.8.10 SIL (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the integrity for the secondary GPS. Selections are:
• UNK • IE-3 • IE-5 • IE-7
• AUTO (Garmin GPS Only)
6.8.11 SDA (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the design assurance for GPS 2 Src. Selections are:
• UNK • D • C • B
6.8.12 Lat Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the secondary GPS lateral offset in meters. Selections are:
• UNK • -6 mt • -4 mt • -2 mt
• 0 mt • 2 mt • 4 mt • 6 mt
6.8.13 Lon Ofst (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures the secondary GPS longitudinal offset. Selections are:
• UNK • 2 mt to 60 mt in 2 mt increments
Figure 6-31 Source, Integrity, and Offset Page
6.8.14 Internal Alt Encoder Installed

Select YES if a GAE module is connected to the backplate.
6.8.15 Ceiling
Configures aircraft maximum altitude between 8,000 feet and 30,000 feet.

Rev. 24 Page 6-27
6.8.16 Test Points

Configures the number of test points used to calibrate the GAE module. The range is 3 to 20. The maximum number of
test points are limited by the aircraft ceiling setting.
Figure 6-32 Internal Alt Encoder Page
6.8.17 Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment

Configures the GAE module altitude to match the primary altitude display.
Figure 6-33 Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-28
6.8.18 Internal AHRS Orientation (GTX 345 Only)

Configures connectors and vent to the orientation of the unit. Refer to figure B-10. Set the yaw angle of the unit
relative to the centerline of aircraft. When setting the yaw angle, a positive angle indicates the GTX 345 is rotated
clockwise from the longitudinal axis of the airplane (line from nose to tail). A negative angle indicates the GTX 345 is
rotated counterclockwise. Refer to figure 6-34.
If the vent is to the left and the connectors are forward/down, the pitch offset is limited to +/- 50°. For all other
orientations, the pitch offset is limited to +/- 30°.
Nose
Positive Yaw Angle
Right Wing
GTX 345
Positive Yaw Angle
Nose
Right Wing
GTX 345
Figure 6-34 Setting the Yaw Angle
Figure 6-35 Internal AHRS Orientation Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-29
6.8.19 Internal AHRS Calibration (GTX 345 Only)

Calibrate the internal AHRS to level (0° pitch and 0° roll). The Internal AHRS Orientation must be set and the aircraft
must be level before beginning this procedure.
Figure 6-36 Internal AHRS Calibration Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-30
6.9 ADSB
NOTE
Both 1090ES and UAT In settings can be set to YES when a portable ADS-B In receiver system, such as
a GDL 39, is installed. It is not necessary to install a certified ADS-B In system.
NOTE
GTX 325: The following items are available if the RS-232 GDL format is configured.
• Aircraft Tail Number
• Allow Pilot to Edit
• Flt ID
• Default Flt ID
• Flt ID Prefix
NOTE
The RS-232 GDL format must be configured to modify UAT OUT RMT CONTROL.
ADSB
ACFT CATGRY
ACFT MAX A/S

ACFT STALL SPEED
METHOD
ACFT STALL SPEED
AIRCRAFT LENGTH
AIRCRAFT WIDTH
1090ES OUT
CONTROL
UAT OUT RMT

CONTROL
1090ES IN CAPABLE
UAT IN CAPABLE
ADS-B IN PROC
NPE PROC
AIRCRAFT TAIL
NUMBER
ADDRESS
ALLOW PILOT TO
EDIT FLT ID
DEFAULT FLT ID
FLT ID PREFIX
Figure 6-37 ADS-B Group

Rev. 24 Page 6-31
6.9.1 Acft Catgry

Configures the aircraft type. Select:
• LIGHT for aircraft with a maximum gross weight less than 15,500 lbs.
• LARGE for aircraft with a maximum gross weight between 75,000 and 300,000 lbs that does not qualify for
the high vortex category.
• HIGH-VORTEX for aircraft with a maximum takeoff weight greater than or equal to 75,000 lbs but less than
300,000 lbs that generates a high wake vortex.
• HEAVY for aircraft with a maximum gross weight of 300,000 lbs or more.
The LARGE, HIGH-VORTEX, AND HEAVY settings are supported in main software version 2.53 and later. These settings
display as “UNSUPPORTED” on panel mount displays. Confirmation of these settings must be done through the GTX
Install Tool.
Selections are:
• UNKNOWN • LIGHT • SMALL • LARGE
• HIGH-VORTEX • HEAVY • HIGH PERFORMANCE • ROTORCRAFT
• GLIDER • LIGHTER-THAN-AIR • ULTRALIGHT • UAV
6.9.2 Acft Max A/S (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)
Configures the maximum airspeed of the aircraft. Selections are:
• UNKNOWN • <=75 kt • <=150 kt • <=300 kt
• <=600 kt • <=1200 kt • >1200 kt
Figure 6-38 Aircraft Category and Max Airspeed Page
6.9.3 Acft Stall Method

Configures which type of action is taken in the event of a stall. Selections are:
• DEFAULT • MANUAL
6.9.4 Acft Stall Speed

If the aircraft category is set to Light, Small, or High Performance, stall speed selections are 30 kts to 200 kts, in 1 kt
increments.
Figure 6-39 Aircraft Stall Method and Stall Speed Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-32
6.9.5 Aircraft Length (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures aircraft length in meters.
• UNKNOWN • <=35 mt • <=65 mt • >85 mt
• <=15 mt • <=45 mt • <=75 mt
• <=25 mt • <=55 mt • <=85 mt
6.9.6 Aircraft Width (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Configures aircraft width in meters.
• Unknown • <=34.0 mt • <= 52.0 mt • <=80.0 mt
• <=23.0 mt • <=38.0 mt • <=59.5 mt • >80 mt
• <=28.5 mt • <=39.5 mt • <=67.0 mt
• <=33.0 mt • <=45.0 mt • <=72.5 mt
Figure 6-40 Aircraft Length and Width Page
6.9.7 1090ES Out Control (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)
NOTE
Pilot control of ADS-B out is not typically required. "Enabled" is the recommended setting for most
installations. Placing the transponder in standby is an acceptable method of disabling ADS-B out if
directed to do so by ATC. Refer to 14 CFR 91.225 item f, FR Doc. 2019-15248 section IV B,
paragraph 4, and AC 20-165B section 3.7.2.2 for more information.
Configures 1090ES ADS-B transmission function. Selections are:

• Enabled • Pilot Set • Disabled
6.9.8 UAT Out Rmt Control

Not available with GDL 88 software v3.41 or earlier.
Figure 6-41 1090ES Out Control and UAT Out Remote Control Page
6.9.9 1090ES In Capable (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Select YES if the aircraft can receive 1090ES ADS-B messages.

Rev. 24 Page 6-33
6.9.10 UAT In Capable (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Select YES if the aircraft can receive UAT ADS-B messages.
Figure 6-42 1090ES In Capable and UAT In Capable Page
6.9.11 ADS-B In Proc (GTX 345 Only)

Configures the ADS-B In processing. Select Enabled to allow ADS-B In traffic processing, with FIS-B based on the FIS-B
Processing setting. Select Disabled to disable all ADS-B In traffic and FIS-B processing.
For remote mount installations with TCAS II, select Enabled/TCAS II.
FIS-B Only is intended for use with ADS-B In displays that support independent sources of traffic and FIS-B. For more
information, refer to section 3.11.
For TCAS II installations where the TCAS is responsible for alerting, select ENABLED with TCAS II. To disable traffic
processing select FIS-B Only.
Selections are:
• Disabled • Enabled • Enabled/TCAS II • FIS-B Only
6.9.12 NPE PROC

NOTE
NPE PROC must be configured to Disabled (default) for certified aircraft installations.
Selections are:
• Disabled • Output Only • OUT/VIS • OUT/VIS/AUD
Figure 6-43 ADS-B In Processing Page
6.9.13 Aircraft Tail Number

Set this to the registered aircraft tail number.

Rev. 24 Page 6-34
6.9.14 Address (GTX 335 and GTX 345 Only)

Set the ICAO address to either octal or hex format. If the tail number is recognized as a US registered tail number, the
ICAO address will be pre-filled by the GTX. It only needs to be compared to the aircraft registration records. Selections
are:
• Octal • Hex
Figure 6-44 Aircraft Tail Number and Address Page
6.9.15 Allow Pilot To Edit Flt ID

NOTE
To avoid a call sign mismatch (CSMM), the Flight ID must always match the Aircraft Identification (call
sign) included in the flight plan for any given flight. Consult with the aircraft operator to determine if
variable flight ID is required for the aircraft. If the operator intends to file a flight plan using an Aircraft
Identification other than the aircraft registration (i.e. "DCM0000" from FltPlan.com), variable flight ID
is required.
Select YES to let the pilot change the flight ID. YES must be selected if variable flight ID is required for the aircraft.
Figure 6-45 Allow Pilot to Edit Flight ID Page
6.9.16 Default Flt ID

Configures the default flight ID used in normal mode. This is typically desired to be the aircraft tail number. Needs
specific to the aircraft and aircraft operators should be considered prior to configuration.
6.9.17 Flight ID Prefix

Configures the flight ID prefix with the carrier abbreviation. For example, Garmin AT is GAT.
Figure 6-46 Default Flight ID and Flight ID Prefix Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-35
6.10 Antenna (Diversity Units Only)

Configures cable delays and losses for the top and bottom antennas, as well as enables or disables non-diversity mode.
NOTE
Optimum performance is achieved when the top and bottom antenna coax cables match for both cable
delay and loss. This ensures the unit meets the DO-181E antenna selection criteria.
ANT
TOP ANTENNA
CABLE LOSS
BOTTOM ANTENNA
CABLE LOSS
DIVERSITY
MODE
Figure 6-47 Antenna Group - Diversity Units Only
6.10.1 Top Antenna Cable Loss

Configures top antenna cable loss in decibels.
• 0dB • .75dB • 1.50dB
• .25dB • 1.00dB • 1.75dB
• .50dB • 1.25db • 2.00dB

Rev. 24 Page 6-36
6.10.2 Bottom Antenna Cable Loss

Configures bottom antenna cable loss in decibels.
• 0dB • .75dB • 1.50dB
• .25dB • 1.00dB • 1.75dB
• .50dB • 1.25db • 2.00dB
If the difference between the top and bottom cable loss is 0.5 dB or greater, the unit must be configured to
compensate for the difference in order to best ensure the unit meets the DO-181E specification for antenna selection
criteria. To configure the cable loss, round each calculated cable loss value to the nearest 0.25 dB and enter the values
in the corresponding antennas slot.
Table 6-9 lists the typical difference in cable delay and loss for several cables.
Table 6-9 Cable Loss and Delay
Cable Delay (ns/ft) Cable Loss (dB/ft) Carlisle IT Type MIL-C-17 Type RG Type
1.46 .180 M17/128-RG400 RG-400
1.46 .1445 3C142B
1.46 .155 M17/60-RG142 RG-142
1.46 .120 M17/112-RG304 RG-304
1.25 .088 311601 M17/127-RG393 RG-393
1.25 .0712 311501
1.25 .0556 311201
1.25 .0363 310801
Figure 6-48 Top and Bottom Antenna Cable Loss Page
6.10.3 Diversity Mode

Configures diversity mode. Select DISABLED to stop the top antenna from transmitting or receiving. Selections are:
• Allowed • Inhibited
Figure 6-49 Diversity Mode Page

Rev. 24 Page 6-37
6.11 Diagnostics
DIAG
DISCRETE INPUT
STATE
LT BUS
INPT
OAT
PHOTO
UNIT
LCD
RS232
A429
GPS SRC 1
SRC 2
HSDB
Figure 6-50 Diagnostics Group

The Diagnostics group shows information for troubleshooting purposes. Information includes:
• Discrete input state
• Lighting bus voltages
• Photocell voltages
• Outside air temperature
• Display temperature
• RS-232 channels
• ARINC 429 channels
• GPS Source 1 and GPS Source 2 status
• HSDB status (GTX 345)
• Gillham input state

Rev. 24 Page 6-38
Figure 6-51 Diagnostics Page
6.11.1 Message Details

In normal mode, the GTX 3X5 displays system messages to alert the pilot of unit failures or service needs. See the
following for an example page of messages displayed in normal mode.
Figure 6-52 Message Details
To support troubleshooting during installation/maintenance activities, additional details pertaining to these messages
are available on the Status page of the GTX Install Tool (refer to the GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide for more
information). On panel mount GTX units, these additional details can also be displayed on the front panel. While on
the messages page shown above, enter the code 5676 using the keypad to enable display of message details. Once
message details have been enabled, they remain enabled for the remainder of the GTX power/reset cycle. When
message details are enabled, the user may scroll through the messages and press "ENT" to see detailed information
about the alert. The figures below show the message details for a Service Soon alert, which is due to an altitude
encoder calibration fault in this example.
Figure 6-53 Message Details - Service Soon
Figure 6-54 Message Details - Altitude Encoder

Rev. 24 Page 6-39
6.12 Remote Unit Configuration

For remote unit configuration refer to GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide.
6.13 Ground Check - GPS Reception Check

NOTE
If an external GPS is in use, GPS reception checks are not necessary.
The GPS check in this section is applicable to GTX 335 and GTX 345 units with an optional internal GPS receiver.
1. Make sure the LAT/LON on the ADS-B Out page matches with a known reference.
2. Select 121.150 MHz on the COM transceiver to be tested.
3. Transmit for a period of 35 seconds.
4. Make sure the LAT/LON continues to match the known reference.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the following frequencies.
• 121.15 MHz • 121.22 MHz • 131.22 MHz • 131.30 MHz
• 121.17 MHz • 121.25 MHz • 131.25 MHz • 131.32 MHz
• 121.20 MHz • 131.20 MHz • 131.27 MHz • 131.35 MHz
6. For VHF radios that include 8.33 kHz channel spacing, include the following frequencies in addition to those in
step 5.
• 121.185 MHz • 130.285 MHz
• 121.190 MHz • 131.290 MHz
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining COM transceivers in the aircraft.
8. Turn on the TCAS system and make sure the GPS position remains valid if the aircraft is TCAS equipped.
9. Use the SATCOM system to make sure the GPS position remains valid if the aircraft is SATCOM equipped.

Rev. 24 Page 6-40
6.14 Ground Check - Transponder

FAR 91.413 transponder checks require the GTX to reply to different types of interrogations. The GTX 335 and
GTX 345 only reply to Mode S/A/C All Calls when airborne. FAR 91.413 provides guidance for the transponder check.
To simulate a temporary airborne state, place the GTX 3X5 in Ground Test mode. Ground Test mode overrides the
air/ground logic to transmit as if the GTX is airborne. This mode has a duration of one power cycle.
To enable Ground Test mode, press and hold CRSR while applying power to the unit. Ground Test mode can be
enabled by the GTX 3X5 Install Tool on the State page.
In main software v2.60 and later and ADS-B software v3.20 and later, the GTX 345 also provides a Traffic Ground Test
mode to support ground checkout of the traffic function. While in traffic ground test mode, the internal pressure
altitude, height above terrain, and radio altitude values used by the traffic function are overridden to avoid suppression
of traffic alerts while on-ground and for consistency with Garmin’s GTS ground check procedures.
Traffic ground test mode is enabled with “Ground Test” mode. It can also be enabled via a GX000 display.
NOTE
If the GTX 345 is configured to interface with a GTS, traffic processing will use 50,000' for ownship
pressure altitude while in traffic ground test mode. This pressure altitude override does not apply if the
GTX 345 is not configured to interface with a GTS. The override value is not used by the transponder
and ADS-B Out functions (i.e. the override pressure altitude value is not transmitted).
When the GTX 345 is integrated with a GTS, traffic ground test mode must be used when performing GTS ground test
procedures. Refer to GTS 8X0/GPA 65 Installation Manual or GTS Processor GTS 825/855/8000 Installation Manual.
The GTX 345 automatically enters traffic ground test mode if an integrated GTS reports ground test mode is active via
HSDB.
6.15 Software Installation Procedure

For software installation procedures refer to GTX 3X5 Installation Tool Guide.

Rev. 24 Page 6-41
Continued Airworthiness
7 Continued Airworthiness
Test the transponder according to Title 14 CFR 91.411 and 91.413 as well as Part 43 Appendix F. Test for ADS-B Out
compliance according to Title 14 CFR 91.227. Other than for regulatory periodic functional checks, maintenance of the
GTX 3X5 is “on condition” only. Periodic maintenance of the GTX 3X5 is not required.

Rev. 24 Page 7-1
Data Formats
Appendix A Data Formats

A.1 RS-232 Air Data Input Format ........................................................................................................................A-2
A.1.1 Electrical Interface ...................................................................................................................................A-2
A.1.2 Altitude Format 1 Sentence .....................................................................................................................A-2
A.1.3 Altitude Format 3 Sentence .....................................................................................................................A-2
A.1.4 Airdata Format 1 Sentence ......................................................................................................................A-3
A.2 ARINC 429 Input Formats...............................................................................................................................A-6
A.3 ARINC 429 Output Formats..........................................................................................................................A-12
A.4 RS-232 National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) 0183 Input Format .................................................A-17
A.4.1 Electrical Interface .................................................................................................................................A-17
A.4.2 General Format .....................................................................................................................................A-17
A.4.3 Recommended Minimum Data (GPRMC) Sentence Data Format ............................................................A-18
A.4.4 Altitude (PGRMZ) Sentence Data Format ...............................................................................................A-19
A.4.5 Aviation Height and VNAV Data (PGRMH) Sentence Data Format ..........................................................A-19
A.5 RS-232 Aviation Input Format ......................................................................................................................A-20
A.5.1 Electrical Interface .................................................................................................................................A-20
A.5.2 General Format .....................................................................................................................................A-20
A.5.3 Geoid Altitude Data (z) Message Data Format .......................................................................................A-20
A.5.4 Latitude Data (A) Message Data Format ................................................................................................A-20
A.5.5 Longitude Data (B) Message Data Format ..............................................................................................A-21
A.5.6 Ground Track Data (C) Message Data Format ........................................................................................A-21
A.5.7 Ground Speed Data (D) Message Data Format.......................................................................................A-21

Rev. 24 Page A-1
Data Formats
A.1 RS-232 Air Data Input Format

A.1.1 Electrical Interface
The input signals are compatible with RS-232C. Data input at 9600 baud with a word length of 8 bits, one stop bit,
and no parity. One message is received per second.
A.1.2 Altitude Format 1 Sentence
The GTX 3X5 is capable of receiving the following 10-byte message from the altitude serializer.
ALT <sp>12345<CR>
Where:
ALT ASCII characters
<sp> space (0x20)
12345 altitude in feet
<CR> carriage return (0x0D)
A.1.3 Altitude Format 3 Sentence
The GTX 3X5 is capable of receiving the following 17-byte message from GAE modules, altitude serializers, and
altitude converters.
RMS<sp><+/->12345T<+/->12ul<CR>
Where:
RMS ASCII characters
<sp> space (0x20)
<+/-> sign indicator (0x2B[+] or 0x2D[-])
12345 altitude in feet
T ASCII character
<+/-> sign indicator
12 sensor temperature
ul checksum of bytes 1 through 14 in hex ASCII (i.e., FA)
<CR> carriage return (0x0D)
NOTE
Checksum is calculated by adding each byte in the message (1 through 14).

Rev. 24 Page A-2
Data Formats
A.1.4 Airdata Format 1 Sentence

The GTX 3X5 is capable of receiving the following message strings from the air data computer.
SHADIN Z FORMAT
<STX>
ZA012<CR><LF> ZA (ASCII characters); 012 represents indicated air speed (knots)
ZB345<CR><LF> ZB (ASCII characters); 345 represents true air speed (knots)
ZC678<CR><LF> ZC (ASCII characters); 678 represents mach speed (thousandths)
ZD<+/->9012<CR><LF> ZD (ASCII characters); sign; 9012 represents pressure altitude (tens of feet)
ZE<+/->3456<CR><LF> ZE (ASCII characters); sign; 3456 represents density altitude (tens of feet)
ZF<+/->78<CR><LF> ZF (ASCII characters); sign; 78 represents outside air temperature (Celsius)
ZG<+/->90<CR><LF> ZG (ASCII characters); sign; 90 represents true air temperature (Celsius)
ZL234<CR><LF> ZL (ASCII characters); 234 represents heading (degrees from north)
ZQ345<CR><LF> ZQ (ASCII characters); 345 represents error log/reason indicator
ZR678<CR><LF> ZR (ASCII characters); 678 represents checksum
<ETX>
Where:
<STX> start-transmit character (0x02)
<CR> carriage-return character (0x0D)
<LF> line-feed character (0x0A)
<ETX> end-transmit character (0x03)
NOTE
Checksum is calculated by adding each byte in the message (including all characters from <STX> up to
and including the error log/reason indicator), such that carries are discarded to give a one byte result.
The ASCII-coded decimal representation of that byte is given, ranging from 0 (0x30, 0x30, 0x30) to 255
(0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. 24 Page A-3
Data Formats
SHADIN G FORMAT
<STX>
GA012<CR><LF> GA (ASCII characters); 012 represents indicated air speed (knots)
GB345<CR><LF> GB (ASCII characters); 345 represents true air speed (knots)
GC678<CR><LF> GC (ASCII characters); 678 represents Mach speed (thousandths)
GD<+/->9012<CR><LF> GD (ASCII characters); sign; 9012 represents pressure altitude (tens of feet)
GE<+/->3456<CR><LF> GE (ASCII characters); sign; 3456 represents density altitude (tens of feet)
GF<+/->78<CR><LF> GF (ASCII characters); sign; 78 represents outside air temperature (Celsius)
GG<+/->90<CR><LF> GG (ASCII characters); sign; 90 represents true air temperature (Celsius)
GK<+/->901<CR><LF> GK (ASCII characters); sign; 901 represents vertical speed (tens of ft/minute)
GL234<CR><LF> GL (ASCII characters); 234 represents heading (degrees from north)
GP89012<CR><LF> GP (ASCII characters); 89012 represents fuel used, left (or Single) (tenths gallons)
GR6789.0<CR><LF> GR (ASCII characters); 6789.0 represents fuel remaining (gallons) [1]
Ga<+/->1234<CR><LF> Ga (ASCII characters); sign; 12.34 represents barometric corrected altitude (tens of feet)
Gb56.78<CR><LF> Gb (ASCII characters); 56.78 represents current barometric pressure setting (inches Hg)
G*901<CR><LF> G* (ASCII characters); 901 represents checksum
<ETX>
Where:
[1] Not available from Airdata Computer
NOTE
(0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. 24 Page A-4
Data Formats
SHADIN S FORMAT
<STX>
SA012<CR><LF> SA (ASCII characters); 012 represents indicated air speed (knots)
SB345<CR><LF> SB (ASCII characters); 345 represents true air speed (knots)
SC678<CR><LF> SC (ASCII characters); 678 represents Mach speed (thousandths)
SD<+/->9012<CR><LF> SD (ASCII characters); sign; 9012 represents pressure altitude (tens of feet)
SE<+/->3456<CR><LF> SE (ASCII characters); sign; 3456 represents density altitude (tens of feet)
SF<+/->78<CR><LF> SF (ASCII characters); sign; 78 represents outside air temperature (Celsius)
SG<+/->90<CR><LF> SG (ASCII characters); sign; 90 represents true air temperature (Celsius)
SK<+/->901<CR><LF> SK (ASCII characters); sign; 901 represents vertical speed (tens of ft/minute)
SL234<CR><LF> SL (ASCII characters); 234 represents heading (degrees from north)
Sa<+/->1234<CR><LF> Sa (ASCII character); sign; 1234 represents barometric corrected altitude (tens of feet)
Sb56.78<CR><LF> Sb (ASCII character); 56.78 represents current barometric pressure setting (inches Hg)
S*901<CR><LF> S* (ASCII character); 901 represents checksum
<ETX>
Where:
NOTE
(0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. 24 Page A-5
Data Formats
A.2 ARINC 429 Input Formats

AHRS
Table A-1 AHRS Inputs
Transmission Periodic
Label Data
Rate Timeout
270 AHRS Discrete Word 500 ms 2000 ms
314 True Heading 50 ms 200 ms
320 Magnetic Heading 50 ms 200 ms
324 Pitch Angle 50 ms 200 ms
325 Roll Angle 50 ms 200 ms
332 Body Lateral Acceleration 60 ms 240 ms
333 Body Normal Acceleration 60 ms 240 ms
340 Inertial Yaw Rate 20 ms 80 ms
365 Inertial Vertical Velocity 40 ms 160 ms
ADC
Table A-2 ADC Inputs
Label Data
Rate Timeout
203 Altitude 62.5 ms 250 ms
204 Baro-Corrected Altitude #1 62.5 ms 250 ms
205 Mach 125 ms 500 ms
206 Indicated Airspeed 125 ms 500 ms
210 True Airspeed 125 ms 500 ms
211 Total Air Temperature 500 ms 2000 ms
212 Altitude Rate 62.5 ms 250 ms
213 Static Air Temperature 500 ms 2000 ms
234 Baro Setting (hPa) 125 ms 500 ms
235 Baro Setting (in Hg) 125 ms 500 ms

Rev. 24 Page A-6
Data Formats
ARINC 743A
Table A-3 ARINC 743A Inputs
Label Data
Rate Timeouts
76 GNSS Altitude 200 ms 2000 ms
101 HDOP 200 ms 2000 ms
102 VDOP 200 ms 2000 ms
103 GNSS Track Angle 200 ms 2000 ms
110 GNSS Latitude 200 ms 2000 ms
111 GNSS Longitude 200 ms 2000 ms
112 GNSS Ground Speed 200 ms 2000 ms
120 GNSS Latitude Fine 200 ms 2000 ms
121 GNSS Longitude Fine 200 ms 2000 ms
130 Horizontal Protection Limit [1] 200 ms 2000 ms
133 Vertical Protection Limit 200 ms 2000 ms
136 Vertical Figure of Merit 200 ms 2000 ms
140 UTC Fine 200 ms 2000 ms
141 UTC Fine Fractions 200 ms 2000 ms
142 Vertical Figure of Merit Velocity [2] 200 ms 2000 ms
Horizontal Figure of Merit Velocity
145 200 ms 2000 ms
[3]
150 UTC 200 ms 2000 ms
165 Vertical Velocity 200 ms 2000 ms
166 North/South Velocity 200 ms 2000 ms
174 East/West Velocity 200 ms 2000 ms
247 Horizontal Figure of Merit 200 ms 2000 ms
260 Date 200 ms 2000 ms
273 GNSS Sensor Status 200 ms 2000 ms
370 GNSS Height 200 ms 2000 ms
[1] When using GTX 3X5 main software v2.85 or later, the unit will inflate the HPL value received on
the ARINC 743A interface by 3% while SBAS Navigation GBAS/GRAS Navigation or Approach
mode are active per the GNSS Sensor Status (Label 273).
[2] When using GTX 3X5 main software v2.85 or later, VFOMV is defaulted to 9.0 m/s if VFOMV is
not received via label 142. Once VFOMV is received, the default value is no longer used and only
received values are used for the remainder of the unit’s power cycle.
[3] When using GTX 3X5 main software v2.85 or later, HFOMV is defaulted to 9.0 m/s for a NACv of
1 if HFOMV is not received via Label 145. Once HFOMV is received, the default value is no longer
used and only received values are used for the remainder of the unit’s power cycle. When using
an ARINC 743A GPS source that does not provide HFOMV, via label 145, the GPS source must be
certified to a NACv of 1 or greater.

Rev. 24 Page A-7
Data Formats
EFIS Air Data

Table A-4 EFIS Air Data
Label Data
Rate Timeout
100 Selected Course #1 250 ms 250 ms
101 Selected Heading 500 ms 2000 ms
102 Selected Altitude 800 ms 800 ms
107 [1] FMS Selected Altitude 200 ms 800 ms
164 Radio Height 250 ms 250 ms
203 Altitude 250 ms 250 ms
204 Baro-Corrected Altitude #1 250 ms 250 ms
205 Mach 500 ms 500 ms
206 Indicated Airspeed 500 ms 500 ms
210 True Airspeed 50 ms 500 ms
211 Total Air Temperature 2000 ms 2000 ms
212 Altitude Rate 250 ms 250 ms
213 Static Air Temperature 2000 ms 2000 ms
Pitch Discrete Data, Bendix/
271 [1] 125 ms 500 ms
King KFC 225/275/325
Roll Discrete Data, Bendix/King
276 [1] 125 ms 500 ms
KFC 225/275/325
304 [1] AFCS Modes 500 ms 2000 ms
305 [1] Target Altitude Source 500 ms 2000 ms
306 Joystick Waypoint Latitude 500 ms 500 ms
307 Joystick Waypoint Longitude 500 ms 500 ms
325 Roll Angle 200 ms 200 ms
General Aviation Equipment
371 500 ms 2000 ms
Identifier
[1] Used only if label 371 is received with the Garmin company identifier.

Rev. 24 Page A-8
Data Formats
Flight Control
Table A-5 Flight Control
Label Data
Rate Timeout
101 Selected Heading 500 ms 2000 ms
102 Selected Altitude 200 ms 800 ms
107 [1] FMS Selected Altitude 200 ms 800 ms
Pitch Discrete Data, Bendix/
271 125 ms 500 ms
King KFC 225/275/325
Roll Discrete Data, Bendix/King
276 125 ms 500 ms
KFC 225/275/325
304 [1] AFCS Modes 500 ms 2000 ms
305 [1] Target Altitude Source 500 ms 2000 ms
General Aviation Equipment
371 500 ms 2000 ms
Identifier
[1] Used only if label 371 is received with the Garmin company identifier.

Rev. 24 Page A-9
Data Formats
Heading
Table A-6 Heading
Label Data
Rate Timeout
Flight ID
Table A-7 Flight ID
Label Data
Rate Timeout
233 Flight ID Data Word 1 5000 ms 20000 ms
Radar Altimeter
Table A-8 Radio Altitude
Label Data
Rate Timeout
164 Radio Height 62.5 ms 250 ms

Rev. 24 Page A-10
Data Formats
Traffic Input
The traffic input formats are only available on the GTX 345.
Table A-9 Traffic Inputs
Label Data
Rate Timeout
013 Control Panel Set 500 ms 2000 ms
015 Altitude Select Limits 500 ms 2000 ms
016 TCAS Mode/ Sense 500 ms 2000 ms
130 Intruder Range 500 ms N/A
131 Intruder Altitude 500 ms N/A
132 Intruder Bearing 500 ms N/A
270 Vertical RA 500 ms 2000 ms
274 TCAS Output 500 ms 2000 ms
350 TCAS Fault Summary 500 ms 2000 ms
357 Request to Send/End of Transmission 500 ms N/A

Rev. 24 Page A-11
Data Formats
A.3 ARINC 429 Output Formats

GPS Data
The GPS data format is used to forward GPS data received from the selected GPS source as defined in ARINC 743. The
GPS Data format can only be used when combined with other ARINC output formats from table A-10. GPS labels
transmit in the order specified.
Table A-10 GPS Data Formats
Transmission Priority
Label Data
Rate Order
273 GNSS Sensor Status 200 ms 1
130 Horizontal Protection Limit 200 ms 2
76 GNSS Altitude (MSL) 200 ms 3
101 [1] Horizontal Dilution of Precision 200 ms 4
103 [1] GNSS Track Angle 200 ms 5
112 GNSS Ground Speed 200 ms 6
136 Vertical Figure of Merit 200 ms 7
145 [1] Horizontal Velocity Figure of Merit 200 ms 8
165 [1] Vertical Velocity 200 ms 9
166 [1] North/South Velocity 200 ms 10
174 [1] East/West Velocity 200 ms 11
247 [1] Horizontal Figure of Merit 200 ms 12
260 Date 200 ms 13
370 [1] GNSS Height 200 ms 14
110 GNSS Latitude 200 ms 15
111 GNSS Longitude 200 ms 16
120 GNSS Latitude Fine 200 ms 17
121 GNSS Longitude Fine 200 ms 18
150 UTC 200 ms 19
[1] Only transmitted on ARINC 429 channels configured for high speed.

Rev. 24 Page A-12
Data Formats
Garmin Concentrator
Table A-11 Garmin Concentrator Labels
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
100 Selected Course #1 200 ms
203 Altitude 100 ms
204 Baro-Corrected Altitude #1 100 ms
206 Indicated Airspeed 100 ms
210 True Airspeed 100 ms
211 Total Air Temperature 100 ms
213 Static Air Temperature 100 ms
306 Joystick Waypoint Latitude 500 ms
307 Joystick Waypoint Longitude 500 ms
314 Own Aircraft True Heading 100 ms
320 Own Aircraft Magnetic Heading 100 ms
TAS Output
The Garmin TAS format is only available on the GTX 335 and the GTX 345. This format is used to perform TCAS
coordination with a Garmin TCAS 1 system. GPS data is also provided to the Garmin TCAS 1 system with this format.
The Garmin TAS format is a simplified version of the transponder-to-TCAS interface specified in ARINC 735, also
known as the XT bus.
Table A-12 TAS Output Labels
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
272 TCAS COORDINATION DATA (MID PART 1) 100 ms
274 TCAS COORDINATION DATA (MID PART 2) 100 ms

Rev. 24 Page A-13
Data Formats
TIS-A Output
The Garmin TIS-A format is only available on the GTX 335. The Garmin TIS-A format is used to send TIS-A traffic data
to traffic displays using a variant of the TCAS-to-Display interface specified in ARINC 735. Because the format is
unidirectional, TIS-A control must be performed by another means, such as the TIS-A toggle discrete.
Table A-13 TIS-A Output Labels
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
130 Intruder Range 500 ms
131 Intruder Altitude 500 ms
132 Intruder Bearing 500 ms
274 TCAS Output 500 ms
313 Own Aircraft Track Angle 500 ms
350 TCAS Fault Summary 500 ms
357 End of Transmission 500 ms
371 GA Equipment Identifier 500 ms
Traffic
The Traffic Output is only available on the GTX 345. The traffic output format is used to send consolidated ADS-B and
TCAS traffic data to a traffic display using a variant of the TCAS-to-display interface specified in ARINC 735.
Table A-14 Traffic Labels
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
Own Aircraft Pressure
203 100 ms
Altitude
313 Own Aircraft True Track 100 ms
314 Own Aircraft True Heading 100 ms
353 ADS-B Alerts and Status 500 ms
354 TAS/TCAS/TCAD Status 500 ms
Request to Send/End of
357 500 ms
Transmission

Rev. 24 Page A-14
Data Formats
ARINC 735 Traffic (GTX 345 Only)
NOTE
The GTX forwards any label received on A429 Traffic Input (except intruder file labels). The labels listed
only include labels the GTX either generates itself or modifies before forwarding.
Table A-15 ARINC 735 Traffic Labels
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
013 Control Panel Set [1]
015 Altitude Select Limits [1]
016 TCAS Mode/Sense [1]
357 Request to Send/End of Transmission 500 ms
[1] These labels are forwarded when received from a connected TAS/TCAS
via the A429 Traffic Input formats. The GTX 345 modifies these labels
with data received via HSDB before forwarding.
BCAS Traffic (GTX 345 Only)
NOTE
The GTX forwards any label received on A429 Traffic Input (except intruder file labels). The labels listed
above only include labels the GTX either generates itself or modifies before forwarding.
Table A-16 BCAS Traffic Labels
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
001 Request to Send 500 ms
013 Control Panel Set [1]
015 Altitude Select Limits [1]
016 TCAS Mode/Sense [1]

Rev. 24 Page A-15
Data Formats
Transmission
Label Data
Rate
... ... ...
274 [2] TCAS Output 500 ms
277 End of Transmission 500 ms
313 [3] Altitude 500 ms
351 Transponder Diagnostics 500 ms
[1] These labels are forwarded when received from a connected TAS/TCAS via the A429
Traffic Input formats. The GTX 345 modifies these labels with data received in the
HSDB packet before forwarding.
[2] If the SSM of the received label 274 (TCAS Output) on Traffic Input is not normal
operation, the GTX sets the RI field to “TA only” and the SL field to 0 before
forwarding. Otherwise, the GTX will forward this label unaltered.
[3] When pressure altitude is received on traffic input, the GTX forwards the data on the
BCAS format in label 313.

Rev. 24 Page A-16
Data Formats
A.4 RS-232 National Marine Electronics Association

(NMEA) 0183 Input Format
and no parity.
A.4.2 General Format

The NMEA 0183 format is used to send GPS data to the GTX 3X5. GPS data received on this interface is not AC 20-
165B compliant. Data should be provided a rate of at least 1 Hz. The format consists of three sentences as described in
the following sections. The first sentence in a group must be the GPRMC sentence and the last must be the PGRMH
sentence. All data fields are ASCII decimal or alphanumeric formats. Data contained within null fields is invalidated.
The general format of a sentence is as follows:
<start> <identifier> <sentence data> <checksum> <end>
Where:
<start> $ (Single ASCII character - 0x24)
<identifier> Five ASCII characters (e.g. “GPRMC”) followed by a comma
<sentence data> n comma delimited data fields of ASCII decimal or alphanumeric format
NOTE
The last field of sentence data does not have a trailing comma.
<checksum> *xx where xx is the hexadecimal XOR checksum
NOTE
The checksum is calculated as the XOR of all bytes between the start of sentence and the checksum as
two ASCII characters.
<end><CR><LF> (carriage-return - 0x0D, line-feed - 0x0A)

Rev. 24 Page A-17
Data Formats
A.4.3 Recommended Minimum Data (GPRMC) Sentence Data Format

Table A-17 GPRMC Sentence Data Format
Field
Field Data Format Description
Number
hh = Hours from (0, 23)
mm = Minutes from 0 to 59)
1 UTC Time hhmmss.ss
ss = Seconds are from 0 to 60)
This field is variable length [1]
A = Active
2 Status a
V = Void
dd = Degrees of latitude
mm.mmm = Decimal minutes
Latitude is in the range of -90.0 to 90 where positive latitudes are
3 Latitude ddmm.mmm
north. Leading zeros are required. The decimal portion of the
minutes is variable length but must provide at least two decimal
places [1].
N = North
4 Latitude Hemisphere a
S = South
ddd = Degrees of longitude
mm.mmm = Decimal minutes
Longitude is in the range of -180.0 to 179.9999 where positive
5 Longitude dddmm.mmm
longitudes are east. Leading zeros are required. The decimal
portion of the minutes is variable length but must provide at least
two decimal places [1].
Longitude hemisphere
Longitude
6 a E = East
Hemisphere
W = West
Ground speed in knots from 0 to 999 knots. This field has a
7 Ground Speed dddd.dd
variable length [1]
Ground track in degrees from 0 to 360 degrees. This field has a
8 Ground Track dddd.dd
variable length [1].
dd = Day of the current month from 1 to 31
9 Date ddmmyy mm = Month of the year from 1 to 12
yy = Years after the year 2000 from 0 to 99
10 Magnetic Variation [2]
Magnetic Variation
11 [2]
Direction
N = Acquisition
12 Fix Type a A = Unaugmented 3D position
D = Differential 3D position
[1] Variable length fields are allowed to have leading zeros and trailing zeros. The decimal is optional and
may be placed at any location as long as it is not the first or last. The overall length of the field is
limited to 14 characters.
[2] This data field is not processed.

Rev. 24 Page A-18
Data Formats
A.4.4 Altitude (PGRMZ) Sentence Data Format

Table A-18 PGRMZ Sentence Data Format
Field
Number
Geoid altitude in feet from -99,999.99 meters,
1 Geoid altitude dddd.dd 99999.99 meters. A sign character is only allowed for
negative altitudes. This field is variable length [1].
2 Geoid altitude units [2] N/A
1 = Invalid
3 Fix type d 2-3 = Valid
All other values are considered valid.
A.4.5 Aviation Height and VNAV Data (PGRMH) Sentence Data Format
Table A-19 PGRMH Sentence Data Format
Field
Number
A = Active
1 Status a
V = Void
Vertical speed in fpm from -99999.99 fpm to 99999.99
2 Vertical Speed dddd.dd fpm. A sign character is only allowed for negative
altitudes. This field is variable length [1].
3 VNAV Profile Error [2] N/A
Vertical Speed to
4 [2] N/A
VNAV Target
Vertical Speed to
5 [2] N/A
Next Target
Approximate
6 Height Above [2] N/A
Terrain
7 Desired Track [2] N/A
Course of Next
8 [2] N/A
Route Leg

Rev. 24 Page A-19
Data Formats
A.5 RS-232 Aviation Input Format

and no parity.
A.5.2 General Format

The Aviation input format is used to send GPS data to the GTX 3X5. GPS data received on this interface is not
AC 20-165B compliant. Data should be provided a rate of at least 1 Hz. The format consists of a single sentence
containing multiple messages as described in the following sections. The “z” message is optional but, if provided, it
must be the first message in the sentence. The order of messages in a sentence must be “z” (optional), “A,” “B,”,
“C,” “D.” The general format of a sentence is as follows:
<start><id><msg><it><id><msg><it>…<id><msg><it><end>
Where:
<start> STX (start-transmit - 0x02)
<id> The message designator character (e.g. z)
<msg> The message data (refer to the following sections for format)
<it> Message terminator
NOTE
If the “z” message is provided, the message terminator is <CR><LF> (carriage-return - 0x0D, line-feed
- 0x0A) for all messages. If the “z” message is not provided, the message terminator is <CR> (carriage-
return - 0x0D) for all messages.
<end> ETX (end-transmit - 0x03)
A.5.3 Geoid Altitude Data (z) Message Data Format

Table A-20 Geoid Altitude Data Message Format
Size in
Byte Format Description
Bytes
Geoid altitude in feet. Only positive Geoid altitudes are
0:4 5 ASCII
supported.
A.5.4 Latitude Data (A) Message Data Format

Table A-21 Latitude Data Message Data Format
Size in
Bytes
Latitude, s dd mmmm format
s = N/S, for northern or southern latitudes
0:8 9 ASCII
dd = degrees of latitude
mmmm = hundredths minutes of latitude

Rev. 24 Page A-20
Data Formats
A.5.5 Longitude Data (B) Message Data Format

Table A-22 Longitude Data Message Data Format
Size in
Bytes
Longitude, s ddd mmmm format
s = E/W, for eastern or western longitudes
0:9 10 ASCII
ddd = degrees of longitude
mmmm = hundredths minutes of longitude
A.5.6 Ground Track Data (C) Message Data Format

Table A-23 Ground Track Data Message Data Format
Size in
Bytes
0:3 3 ASCII Ground track in degrees from 0 through 359
A.5.7 Ground Speed Data (D) Message Data Format

Table A-24 Ground Speed Data Message Data Format
Size in
Bytes
0:3 3 ASCII Ground speed in knots

Rev. 24 Page A-21
GTX 3X5 Mechanical Drawings
Appendix B GTX 3X5 Mechanical Drawings

NON-DIVERSITY UNITS
Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Assembly ................................................................................................... B-2
Figure B-2 GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................................................. B-3
Figure B-3 GTX 3X5R GPS Standard Remote Mount Assembly .............................................................................. B-4
Figure B-4 GTX 3X5R GPS Standard Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity ......................................... B-5
Figure B-5 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Assembly .......................................................................................... B-6
Figure B-6 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity .................................................... B-7
Figure B-7 GTX 3X5R GPS G1000 Mount Rack Assembly ...................................................................................... B-8
Figure B-8 GTX 3X5R GPS G1000 Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................................ B-9
Figure B-9 GTX 3X5 Panel Cutout Detail ............................................................................................................. B-10
Figure B-10 GTX 3X5 Connectors and Vent Locations ......................................................................................... B-11
Figure B-11 Backplate, Connector Kit, and Optional Altitude Encoder ................................................................. B-11
DIVERSITY UNITS
Figure B-12 GTX 335D/345D Panel Mount Assembly .......................................................................................... B-12
Figure B-13 GTX 335D/345D Panel Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity ..................................................... B-13
Figure B-14 GTX 335DR/345DR Standard Remote Mount Assembly .................................................................... B-14
Figure B-15 GTX 335DR/345DR Standard Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity .............................. B-15
Figure B-16 GTX 335DR/345DR Vertical Remote Mount Assembly ...................................................................... B-16
Figure B-17 GTX 335DR/345DR Vertical Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity .............................................. B-17
Figure B-18 GTX 335DR/345DR G1000 Mount Rack Assembly ............................................................................ B-18
Figure B-19 GTX 335DR/345DR G1000 Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity ................................. B-19
Figure B-20 GTX 335DR/345DR Hi-Vib Vertical Remote Mount Assembly ............................................................ B-20
Figure B-21 GTX 335DR/345DR Hi-Vib Vertical Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity ................................... B-21
Figure B-22 GTX 335DR/345DR Connectors and Vent Locations ......................................................................... B-22
Figure B-23 Backplate, Connector Kit, and Optional Altitude Encoder ................................................................. B-22

Rev. 24 Page B-1
NON-DIVERSITY UNITS
BACK PLATE
RACK
UNIT
Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-2
For unit part numbers and kit contents refer to table 3-1. For part numbers of supplied accessories refer to table 3-2.
UNIT DESCRIPTION inch (mm) inch (mm) Dim C -

Dim A - Dim B -
inch (mm)
GTX 325 4.5 (114) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (20)
GTX 335 4.5 (114) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (20)
GTX 335 NV 4.5 (114) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (20)
GTX 335, GPS 4.5 (114) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345 4.7 (119) 3.0 (76) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345 NV 4.7 (119) 3.0 (76) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345, GPS 4.6 (117) 3.0 (76) 0.8 (20) VENT
GTX 345 NV, GPS 4.6 (117) 3.0 (76) 0.8 (20)
9.57
243.0
DIM A
6.25
158.8 6.22
BEZEL 158.0
DIM B
8.58
217.8
10.05
255.3
1.65 1.67 6X C'SINK FOR 6-32

41.9 42.4 FLAT HEAD SCREW
.65 BEZEL RACK ALIGNMENT DIMPLES

.33
16.5
8.3
1.73
DIM C 43.8
.49
12.5 .44 6.99
11.1 177.4
Figure B-2 GTX 3X5 GPS Panel Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-3
BACK PLATE
RACK
UNIT
Figure B-3 GTX 3X5R GPS Standard Remote Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-4
VENT
Dim A - Dim B - Dim C -
UNIT DESCRIPTION inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
GTX 335R 4.8 (120) 3.3 (84) 0.8 (20)
GTX 335R, GPS 4.9 (124) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345R 5.0 (127) 3.0 (76) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345R, GPS 5.0 (127) 3.1 (79) 0.8 (20)
10.05
255.3
.58 9.57
14.7 243.0
6.22
158.0
DIM B
1.72
43.8
DIM A
.65
16.5
DIM C
.33
8.3 .44 6.99
11.1 177.4
.49
12.5
Figure B-4 GTX 3X5R GPS Standard Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-5
Figure B-5 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-6
1.22 9.29
31.1 236.0
.74
UNIT DESCRIPTION inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) 18.7
GTX 335R 5.5 (140) 2.7 (69) 1.0 (25)
GTX 335R, GPS 5.5 (140) 2.8 (71) 0.9 (23)
GTX 345R 5.6 (142) 2.7 (69) 0.9 (23)
GTX 345R, GPS 5.6 (142) 2.7 (69) 0.9 (23)
6.56
166.7
1.81
45.8
.60
15.3
.875
22.23
C
1.03 4.00
26.1 101.6
8.00
203.2
11.4
290
Figure B-6 GTX 3X5 Vertical Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-7
BACK PLATE
RACK
UNIT
2X NUT PLATE KIT, G1000, 3 POS,

GPN011-00915-01USE 4 SCREWS MIN
LOCATED AS SHOWN PER SIDE
Figure B-7 GTX 3X5R GPS G1000 Mount Rack Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-8
Dim A -
UNIT DESCRIPTION inch Dim B - Dim C -
(mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
GTX 335R 5.3 (135) 3.2 (81) 0.7 (18)
GTX 335R, GPS 5.3 (135) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345R 5.4 (137) 3.0 (76) 0.8 (20) VENT, NO BLOCK
GTX 345R, GPS 5.4 (137) 3.1 (79) 0.8 (20)
.96
24.4
.48
12.2
10.48
.38 266.3
9.7 .06 10.00
1.6 254.0
6.90
7.26 6.30
175.3
184.5 160.1
DIM B
DIM A
NUT PLATE REMOVED
FOR CLARITY THIS SIDE
1.75
1.70 2X .96
44.4
43.1 24.4
DIM C
3X .44
2X .48 11.1
12.2 3X 3.35
85.1
2X .38
9.7
Figure B-8 GTX 3X5R GPS G1000 Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-9
6.32
SUGGESTED STACK DIMENSION OPTION #1
1.68
0.04
2.35 0.27
6.32
SUGGESTED PANEL CUTOUT OPTION #2
NOTES - BOTH OPTIONS

1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. IF THE FRONT LIP OF THE MOUNTING RACK IS BEHIND
THE SURFACE OF THE AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENT PANEL,
THE UNIT CONNECTORS MAY NOT FULLY ENGAGE.
Figure B-9 GTX 3X5 Panel Cutout Detail

Rev. 24 Page B-10
VENT
CONNECTORS
Figure B-10 GTX 3X5 Connectors and Vent Locations
OPTIONAL ALTITUDE
ENCODER 011-03080-00
BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR KIT
Figure B-11 Backplate, Connector Kit, and Optional Altitude Encoder

Rev. 24 Page B-11
DIVERSITY UNITS
Figure B-12 GTX 335D/345D Panel Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-12
UNIT DESCRIPTION Dim A - Dim B - Dim C -

inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
GTX 335D 4.6 (118) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (21)
GTX 345D 4.6 (118) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (19)
11.1 177.4 1.3

.44 6.99 .05
8.3
.33
16.5
.65
1.3
VENT .05
243.0
9.57
DIM A
160.0
6.30 160.0
BEZEL 6.30
DIM B
41.9 217.8
1.65 8.58
BEZEL 255.3
10.05
21.0
.83
41.3
1.63
DIM C
Figure B-13 GTX 335D/345D Panel Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-13
BACKPLATE
RACK
UNIT
Figure B-14 GTX 335DR/345DR Standard Remote Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-14

GTX 335DR 4.9 (125) 3.3 (84) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345DR 4.9 (125) 3.2 (81) 0.8 (21)
1.3
.05
11.1 177.4
.44 6.99
16.5
.65
1.0
.04
243.0
9.57
DIM A
160.0
6.30
DIM B
13.5 217.8
.53 8.58
255.3
10.05
41.3
1.63
DIM C
Figure B-15 GTX 335DR/345DR Standard Remote Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-15
UNIT
BACKPLATE
TOE
SHOE
Figure B-16 GTX 335DR/345DR Vertical Remote Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-16

GTX 335DR 4.4 (113) 2.9 (74) 0.8 (21)
GTX 345DR 4.3 (108) 2.9 (73) 0.9 (22) DIM A
DIM C
38.0
1.50 18.7
.74
166.6
6.56
DIM B
45.7 238.4 30.4

1.80 9.39 1.20
203.2
8.00 101.6 26.1
4.00 1.03
22.2
.88
290.1 11.7
11.4 .46
Figure B-17 GTX 335DR/345DR Vertical Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-17
BACKPLATE
RACK
UNIT
Figure B-18 GTX 335DR/345DR G1000 Mount Rack Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-18

UNIT DESCRIPTION
GTX 335DR 5.0 (127) 3.3 (84) 0.8 (20)
GTX 345DR 5.2 (133) 3.1 (80) 0.8 (21)
9.5 85.1
.38 3.35
1.0
12.2 .04
.48
24.4
.96
1.0
.04
252.4
9.94
DIM A
175.3
6.90
DIM B
227.3
8.95
12.2
.48 4.1 264.7
.16 10.42
24.4
.96
42.4
1.67
DIM C
Figure B-19 GTX 335DR/345DR G1000 Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-19
Wedge Lock Screw

Torque: 16 1 IN-LB
Screw, 8-32 100° FHP

Torque 16 1 IN-LB
Figure B-20 GTX 335DR/345DR Hi-Vib Vertical Remote Mount Assembly

Rev. 24 Page B-20

GTX 335DR 5.5 (140) 3.2 (81) 0.7 (18)
GTX 345DR 6.0 (152) 3.4 (86) 0.9 (23) 1.777
7.03
DIM B
DIM A
10.94
4X .177
1.313
DIM C
.625 7.000
Figure B-21 GTX 335DR/345DR Hi-Vib Vertical Mount Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 24 Page B-21
VENT
CONNECTORS
VENT
Figure B-22 GTX 335DR/345DR Connectors and Vent Locations
OPTIONAL ALTITUDE
ENCIODER 011-03080-00
CONNECTOR KIT BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY
Figure B-23 Backplate, Connector Kit, and Optional Altitude Encoder

Rev. 24 Page B-22
Equipment Compatibility and Configuration
Appendix C Equipment Compatibility and

Configuration
C.1 ADS-B In Displays ...........................................................................................................................................C-2
C.2 GPS Sources...................................................................................................................................................C-4
C.3 Altitude Sources.............................................................................................................................................C-7
C.4 Audio Panels ................................................................................................................................................C-10
C.5 Radio Altimeters...........................................................................................................................................C-10
C.6 Heading Reference Sources ..........................................................................................................................C-11
C.7 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only) .....................................................................................................................C-13
C.8 Bluetooth.....................................................................................................................................................C-14
C.9 Remote Control ...........................................................................................................................................C-15
C.10 TIS-A Displays.............................................................................................................................................C-16

Rev. 24 Page C-1
C.1 ADS-B In Displays

Table C-1 ADS-B In Displays
Data GTX 345 Configuration
Manufacturer Model Interface Configuration Notes
Format Setting
GTN 6XX/7XX HSDB ADS-B In Source: GTX Navigator - Present
Supports control of ADS-B Traffic only
ADSB TFC GNS (also includes GPS data from the
GNS 400W/500W).
RS-232
Supports FIS-B and control of
ADSB TFC WX GNS ADS-B traffic (also includes GPS data
GNS 400W/500W Series [2] from the GNS 400W/500W).
Supports ADS-B traffic without
ADSB TFC TRAFFIC
TAS/TCAS.
ARINC 429
Supports ADS-B traffic w/ TAS/TCAS
ADSB TFC w/TCAS TRAFFIC
correlation.
Supports GTX 345R installations only

RS-232 GDL 90 LGCY TRAFFIC
(ADS-B traffic).
Garmin Garmin MX Series 1 [1]

G950/G1000 [3]
OR
Supports GTX 345R installations only
RS-422 GDL 90 ADS-B Garmin MX Series 3 [1] [4]
(FIS-B).
OR
Off [1]
G1000 NXi/G2000/G3000/
HSDB N/A GX000 - Present Configuration per loader card.
G5000
The GMX 200 does not display
correlated traffic. If a combined ADS-B
FIS Data Link: Enabled
In and TAS/TCAS system is installed in
GDL 90 UAT Radio: Disp Only
GMX 200 RS-422 MX Format 1 the aircraft, an additional approved
GDL 90 Code Edit: Disabled
display must provide the correlated
UAT Source: Port 4
picture. Refer to AC 20-172B,
appendix C.
GDU 620 HSDB ADS-B TX: Installed G500/G600 Present
GDU 700( )/1060 HSDB ADS-B Selections: GTX 345 G500/G600 Present

Rev. 24 Page C-2
Data GTX 345 Configuration

Manufacturer Model Interface Configuration Notes
Format Setting
Traffic Source: GTX 345
Interface: GTX 345
GI 275 HSDB SFD - Present
Ports/Config:
Garmin Active Traffic, TAS/TCAS
GPS 175 HSDB ADS-B SRC - GTX Navigator - Present
GNC 355 HSDB ADS-B SRC - GTX Navigator - Present
The MX 20 does not display correlated
FIS Data Link: Enabled traffic. If a combined ADS-B In and
GDL 90 UAT Radio: Disp Only TAS/TCAS system is installed in the
UPSAT MX20 RS-422 MX Format 2
GDL 90 Code Edit: Disabled aircraft, an additional approved display
UAT Source: Port 4 must provide the correlated picture.
Refer to AC 20-172B appendix C.
Honeywell Various ARINC 429 BCAS BCAS
Various Various ARINC 429 ARINC 735 A735
[1] If GDU software v12.00 and later and GIA software prior to v6.20 is used.
[2] The GNS 400W/500W interface requires the combination of one RS-232 and one ARINC 429 interface.
[3] Audio Cancel or Traffic Audio Cancel must be configured if an active traffic system is interfaced. Traffic Audio Cancel is recommended for the
GTX 345, to cancel/acknowledge traffic audio alerts.
[4] When using software v2.65 or later, Garmin MX Series 3 format should be used to provide FIS-B to G1000.

Rev. 24 Page C-3
C.2 GPS Sources

Table C-2 GPS Sources
Data Interface GTX 3X5

Manufacturer Model Notes
Format Configuration Configuration
REMOTE FMT 1 [1,3]
OR
GTX 33ES #1 [1] REMOTE FMT 2 [2,3] The primary purpose of this interface is transponder
G950/G1000 RS-232 OR control, however this format also includes GPS data.
GTX 33ES #1 w/ TIS [2] LGCY REMOTE 1 [1,4] Refer to table C-9. Not applicable to the GTX 325.
OR
LGCY REMOTE 2 [2,4]
XPDR FMT 1 [1]
G1000 NXi/ Configuration per loader card. Not applicable to the
RS-232 GTX 3X5 OR
G2000/G3000/ GTX 325.
XPDR FMT 2 [2]
G5000
HSDB N/A GX000 - Present GTX 345 only, configuration per loader card.
Internal N/A N/A Refer to section 6.8.
In GTN software v6.20 and later, ADS-B+ Format 2 is
Garmin RS-232 ADS-B OUT+ Format 1 ADS-B + FMT 1 available and recommended, with
GTX 3X5 ADS-B+ FMT 2.
GTN 6XX/7XX GTX Mode S+ [1] REMOTE FMT 1 [1] The primary purpose of this interface is transponder
RS-232 OR OR control, however, this format also includes GPS data.
GTX w/TIS+ [2] REMOTE FMT 2 [2] Refer to table C-9.
HSDB ADS-B In Source: GTX Navigator - Present Applicable to GTX 345 installations only.
ADSB TFC Applicable to GTX 345 only (software version 2.10 and
earlier), or GTX 325/335/345 (software version 2.11
and later). Note that the primary purpose of this
GNS 400W/ GNS interface is for ADS-B In Data, however this format also
RS-232 ADSB TFC WX includes GPS data. Refer to table C-1.
500W
When interfacing with a GNS, the GNS format is
preferred over the ADS-B+ FMT 1 format.
ADS-B OUT + ADS-B+ FMT 1 Supports GPS data only.

Rev. 24 Page C-4

GTX + [1] [5] REMOTE FMT 1 [1] Note that the primary purpose of this interface is
GNS 480 transponder control, however this format also includes
RS-232 GTX w/TIS+ [2] REMOTE FMT 2 [2] GPS data. Refer to table C-9.
(CNX80)
ADS-B OUT + ADS-B+ FMT 2 Set the GNS 480 serial port baud rate to 38400.
ADS-B + FMT 1 ADS-B+ FMT 1
GTX 3X5 RS-232
ADS-B + FMT 2 ADS-B+ FMT 2
Garmin cont’d ARINC 429 ARINC 743A ARINC 743A
GDL 88 with
GPS/SBAS RS-232 ADS-B+ Format 2 ADS-B+ FMT 2 Available in GDL 88 software v3.20 and later.
RS-232 ADS-B+ Format 2 ADS-B+ FMT 2
GPS 175
HSDB ADS-B SRC - GTX Navigator - Present
RS-232 ADS-B+ Format 2 ADS-B+ FMT 2
GNC 355
HSDB ADS-B SRC - GTX Navigator - Present

Rev. 24 Page C-5

When using GTX 3X5 main software v2.85 or later, the
unit inflates the HPL value received on the
ARINC 743A interface by 3% while SBAS Navigation,
GBAS/GRAS Navigation, or Approach mode are active
per the GNSS Sensor Status (Label 273). VFOMV is
defaulted to 9.0 m/s if VFOMV is not received vial Label
142. Once VFOMV is received, the default value is no
longer used and only received values are used for the
remainder of the unit’s power cycle. HFOMV is
defaulted to 9.0 m/s for a NACv of 1 if HFOMV is not
received via Label 145. Once HFOMV is received, the
Various Various ARINC 429 ARINC 743A ARINC 743A
default value is no longer used and only received values
are used for the remainder of the unit’s power cycle.
When using an ARINC 743A GPS source that does not
provide HFOMV, via Label 145, the GPS source must be
certified to a NACv of 1 or greater.
GTX 3X5 main v2.85 or later is recommended when

using an ARINC 743A position source. GTX 3X5 main
v2.85 or later is required if the ARINC 743A source
doesn't provide HFOMV via Label 145 or VFOMV via
Label 142. VFOMV is only need for GTX 345(D)(R).
[1] Installations with no TIS.

[2] Installations with TIS (GTX 335 only).
[3] Installations with GDU software v15.xx.
[4] Installations with GDU software prior to v15.00.
[5] Format is for GTX 335/GTX 345. Not for use with the GTX 325.

Rev. 24 Page C-6
C.3 Altitude Sources

Table C-3 Altitude Sources
GTX 3X5
Interfacing Equipment
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration Notes
Configuration
Setting
ACT Tech A-30 RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 25 ft
B&D 90004-003 ARINC 429 N/A ADC
Interface is primarily for providing true heading to the
GEN PURPOSE EFIS AIR DATA GTX, however this format also provides altitude. Refer
G950/G1000 ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH) (Speed: HIGH) to table C-6. Required if external traffic system is
installed.
G1000 NXi/ XPDR FMT [1]
Configuration per loader card. Not applicable to
G2000/ RS-232 GTX 3X5 OR
GTX 325.
G3000/G5000 XPDR FMT2 [2]
G1000 NXi/
G2000/ HSDB N/A GX000 - Present GTX 345 only. Configuration per loader card.
Garmin G3000/G5000
GDC 72 ARINC 429 N/A ADC
GDC 74( ) ARINC 429 N/A ADC
GRS 79 ARINC 429 N/A ADC
ADC
GSU 75 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: HIGH)
GENERAL EFIS AIR DATA [3]
GDU 620 ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH) (Speed: HIGH)

Rev. 24 Page C-7
GTX 3X5
Configuration
Setting
Traffic/ADS-B:
GTX ADS-B #( ) GTX 345 only.
HSDB G500/G600 - Present
+TAS/TCAS/TCAD:
Enabled [4]
General Purpose 2:
ERIS AIR DATA [3]
GDU 700( )/ ARINC 429 Present
(Speed: High)
1060 (Speed: High)
Garmin cont’d HSDB ADS-B: GTX 345 G500/G600 - Present GTX 345 only.
This configuration is primarily for purposes of
GTX Mode S+ [1] REMOTE FMT 1 [1]
transponder remote control, however this
GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 OR OR
configuration also provides altitude data. Refer to
GTX w/TIS+ [2] REMOTE FMT 2 [2]
table C-9.
Garmin Altitude
GAE 12 N/A N/A
Encoder: Present
Honeywell KDC 281 ARINC 429 N/A ADC

(Bendix/King) KDC 481 ARINC 429 N/A ADC
Icarus
3000 RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 100 ft
Instruments
RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 25 ft Either RS-232 or Gillham Gray code format can be
Sandia SAE 5-35 used to provide altitude data from the Sandia
Discrete N/A Gillham Discretes ON SAE 5-35 to the GTX 3X5.

Rev. 24 Page C-8
GTX 3X5
Configuration
Setting
Applicable to installations with the 8800T unit
RS-232 25 ft or lower encoding ALT FMT 3 25 ft
configured for 25ft or lower encoding.
8800T
Applicable to installations with the 8800T unit
RS-232 100 ft encoding ALT FMT 3 100 ft
configured for parallel Gray source or 100 ft encoding.
F/ADC-200 RS-232 N/A ADC FMT 1
Shadin
RS-232 N/A ADC FMT 1

Either the RS-232 or ARINC 429 data format can be
F/ADC-2000 used for the Shadin F/ADC-2000 interface to the GTX
(not both).
ARINC 429 N/A ADC (Speed: LOW)
IA-RS232-X RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 100 ft

Applicable to installations with the SSD120 unit
Trans-Cal RS-232 25 ft or lower encoding ALT FMT 1 25 ft
configured for 25ft or lower encoding.
Industries SSD120
Applicable to installations with the SSD120 unit
RS-232 100 ft encoding ALT FMT 1 100 ft
configured for parallel Gray source or 100ft encoding.
[1] Installation with no TIS traffic.

[2] Installation with TIS traffic (GTX 335 only).
[3] Altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, attitude, and heading information.
[4] Only if GTX 345 is correlating external traffic.

Rev. 24 Page C-9
C.4 Audio Panels

Table C-4 Audio Panels
GTX 3X5
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration
Setting
SL10, SL10MS, SL10M, SL10S, SL15, SL15M, GMA 340, GMA 347, GMA 35, GMA
Garmin
350
Analog Audio Audio: XPDR
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KMA 24, KMA 24H-70/71, KMA 26, DMA 28
PS Engineering PMA 6000, PMA 7000 Series, PMA 8000 Series
C.5 Radio Altimeters

Table C-5 Radio Altimeters
Manufacturer Model Data Format Interface Configuration GTX 3X5 Configuration

Free Flight RA-4500
Garmin GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429 N/A RADIO ALTITUDE
Honeywell (Bendix King) KRA 405B

Rev. 24 Page C-10
C.6 Heading Reference Sources

Table C-6 Heading Reference Sources
Interfacing
Configuration GTX 3X5
Manufacturer Model Equipment Notes
Parameter Configuration Setting
Configuration
HEADING [1]
Aspen EFD1000 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: LOW)
EXP5000 HEADING [1]
Avidyne ARINC 429
700-00006-() (Speed: LOW)
AHRS [2]
Collins AHC-85E ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH)
EFIS AIR DATA [3]
G950/G1000 ARINC 429 GEN PURPOSE
(Speed: HIGH)
G1000 NXi/ XPDR FMT 1 [4]
G2000/G3000/ RS-232 GTX 3X5 OR Configuration per loader card.
G5000 XPDR FMT 2 [5]
G1000 NXi/
G2000/G3000/ HSDB N/A GX000 - Present GTX 345 only: Configuration per loader card.
G5000
AHRS [2]
GRS 77 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: HIGH)
Garmin GRS 79 ARINC 429 N/A AHRS [2]
AHRS [2]
GSU 75 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: HIGH)
HEADING [1]
GAD 42 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: LOW)
EFIS AIR DATA [3] Note that this interface also provides altitude
ARINC 429 GENERAL
(Speed: HIGH) data. Refer to table C-3.
GDU 620 Traffic/ADS-B: GTX

ADS-B #( )
HSDB G500/G600 - Present GTX 345 only.
+TAS/TCAS/TCAD:
Enabled [6]

Rev. 24 Page C-11
Interfacing
Configuration GTX 3X5
Manufacturer Model Equipment Notes
Parameter Configuration Setting
Configuration
General Purpose 2:
ERIS AIR DATA [3]
ARINC 429 Present
GDU 700( )/1060 (Speed: High)
(Speed: High)
HSDB ADS-B: GTX 345 G500/G600 - Present GTX 345 only.
This configuration is primarily for purposes of
GTX Mode S+ [4] REMOTE FMT 1 [4]
Garmin transponder remote control, however this
GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 OR OR
configuration also provides magnetic heading.
GTX w/TIS+ [5] REMOTE FMT 2 [5]
Refer to table C-9.
HEADING [1]
GNS 400W/500W ARINC 429 ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH)
Honeywell EFIS 40/50 HEADING [1]
ARINC 429
(Bendix/King) (SG 465) (Speed: LOW)
AHRS [2]
SN3500 N/A
(Speed: LOW)
Sandel ARINC 429
AHRS [2]
SN3308
(Speed: LOW)
[1] Heading information only.

[2] Attitude and heading information.
[3] Altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, attitude, and heading information.
[4] Installation with no TIS traffic.
[5] Installation with TIS traffic (GTX 335 only).
[6] Only if GTX 345 is correlating external traffic.

Rev. 24 Page C-12
C.7 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only)

Table C-7 Traffic Sensors
Interfacing GTX 345

Configuration I/O
Manufacturer Model Equipment Configuration Notes
Parameter (To/From GTX)
Configuration Setting
RYAN TAS 600 Configuration setting available on RS-232
Avidyne RS-232 Input/Output N/A TRAFFIC FMT 4
(9900BX) Channel 4 only.
Traffic Display
TRAFFIC
Input Destination
(Speed - HIGH)
(Primary TX) [1]
Transponder 1
Communication FORMAT 4
Data format includes Garmin TAS.
(Primary RX) (Speed - HIGH)
[1]
Pressure Altitude
Source (Primary
RX);
Magnetic Heading
Output [2] Source (Primary
ARINC 429 [3] RX);
Garmin GTS 8XX GPS Position/ FORMAT 5 Data format includes Garmin TAS as well as
Velocity/Time (Speed - HIGH) Garmin concentrator; required for G1000.
Source (Primary
RX);
Transponder 1
Communication
(Primary RX)
[1]
This interface is required for GTS 8xx
Transponder 1
installations, even though it does not
N/A Communication
N/A correspond to physical interface/wiring
(Primary TX) [1]
(configure for an unused ARINC 429 output
(Speed - LOW)
port on the GTS 8XX).
HSDB Input/Output N/A GTS-Enabled Configuration per loader card.

Rev. 24 Page C-13
Interfacing GTX 345

Configuration I/O
Manufacturer Model Equipment Configuration Notes
Parameter (To/From GTX)
Configuration Setting
Installations with a GTX 345D(R) and
KTA 870 TAS are susceptible to a latching
KTA 870 failure that requires a power cycle
of the KTA 870 to clear. The failure may
occur if the GTX 345D(R) is powered up
KTA 870/810 Controller -
after the KTA 870.
KMH 880/820 Discrete
Honeywell TRAFFIC 5
KTA 970/910 ARINC 429 Input Intruder File
(Bendix/King) (Speed - HIGH) The failure may result in a
KMH 980/920 Protocol - ARINC
“MODEC_SUPPRESSION_EXCEPTION -
TPU-66A 735
suppression not set during interrogation”
fault in the KTA 870. To avoid the issue
power on the GTX 345D(R) before the
KTA 870. If the issue occurs, cycle power on
the KTA 870.
SKY 497 TRAFFIC 2
L3 Comm ARINC 429 Input N/A
SKY 899 (Speed - HIGH)
[1] Configure the listed function(s) with the appropriate ARINC 429 channel based on the specific installation.
[2] ARINC 429 output from GTX 345 to GTS 800 is not required, but is required for all other GTS 8XX units.
[3] Not required for G1000 NXi/G2000/G3000/G5000.
C.8 Bluetooth
Table C-8 Bluetooth
GTX 345 Configuration

Manufacturer Model Data Format Input/Output Notes
Setting
Internal Bluetooth N/A Bluetooth: Enabled
RS-232 Input CONNEXT FMT 3 Both the RS-232 input and RS-422
Garmin output are required; internal Bluetooth
Flight Stream 110/210
must be disabled on the GTX with a FS
RS-422 Output CONNEXT FMT 3 110/210 installation.

Rev. 24 Page C-14
C.9 Remote Control

Table C-9 Remote Control
GTX 325 GTX 335 GTX 345

Data Interface
Manufacturer Model Configuration Configuration Configuration Notes
Format Configuration
Setting Setting Setting
GTX Mode S+ REMOTE FMT 1 REMOTE FMT 1 REMOTE FMT 1 Installations with no TIS.
GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232
GTX w/TIS+ N/A REMOTE FMT 2 N/A Installations with TIS.
GTX+ N/A REMOTE FMT 1 REMOTE FMT 1 Installations with no TIS.

GNS 480 RS-232
GTX w/TIS+ N/A REMOTE FMT 2 N/A Installation with TIS.
GTX 33 [1] REMOTE FMT 1 [3] REMOTE FMT 1 [3]

OR N/A OR OR Installations with no TIS.
GTX 33ES [2] LGCY REMOTE 1 [4] LGCY REMOTE 1 [4]
G950/G1000 RS-232
GTX 33 w/TIS [1] REMOTE FMT 2 [3]
Garmin Installations with TIS.
OR N/A OR N/A
GTX 33ES w/TIS [2] LGCY REMOTE 2 [4]
Installation with no TIS.
RS-232 GTX 3X5 N/A XPDR FMT 1 XPDR FMT 1 Configuration per loaded
card.
G1000 NXi/
Installation with TIS.
G2000/G3000/
RS-232 GTX 3X5 N/A XPDR FMT 2 N/A Configuration per loaded
G5000
card.
Configuration per loader
HSDB N/A N/A N/A GX000 - Enabled
card.
Transponder 1/2 -
GI 275 [5] HSDB N/A N/A SFD - Present GTX 345 only
GTX 345
[1] GDU software prior to v9.10.

[2] GDU software v9.10 and later.
[3] GDU software v15.xx.
[5] GI 275 software 2.30 and later.

Rev. 24 Page C-15
C.10 TIS-A Displays

Table C-10 TIS-A Displays
GTX 335
Data Interface
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes
Format Configuration
Setting
Note that the primary purpose of this interface is for
GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 GTX w/TIS+ REMOTE FMT 2 remote control, however this format also includes
TIS-A data. Refer to table C-9.
GDU 620 ARINC 429 GTX 330 FORMAT 8
GNS 400W/500W Series ARINC 429 GARMIN GTX 330 FORMAT 8
Note that the primary purpose of this interface is for
GNS 480 RS-232 GTX w/TIS+ REMOTE FMT 2 remote control, however this format also includes
TIS-A data. Refer to table C-9.
Garmin
GTX 33 w/TIS [1] REMOTE FMT 2 [3] Note that the primary purpose of this interface is for
G950/G1000 RS-232 OR OR remote control, however this format also includes
GTX 33ES w/TIS [2] LGCY REMOTE 2 [4] TIS-A data. Refer to table C-9.
G1000 NXi/G2000/
RS-232 GTX 3X5 XPDR FMT 2 Configuration per loader card.
G3000/G5000
GDU 700( )/1060 ARINC 429 GTX 33/330/335 Format 8
Type: TIS-A
GI 275 ARINC 429 Format 8
Interface GTX 33X

[2] GDU software v9.10 and later.
[3] GDU software v15.xx.

Rev. 24 Page C-16
Interconnect Drawings
Appendix D Interconnect Drawings

Figure D-1 GTX 3X5 Power Configuration Typical Interconnect ............................................................................D-3
Figure D-2 GTX 345 - G1000 Interconnect ...........................................................................................................D-5
Figure D-3 GTX 335 - G1000 Interconnect ...........................................................................................................D-7
Figure D-4 GTX 335/GTX 345 - GNS 480 (CNX80) Interconnect ...........................................................................D-8
Figure D-5 GTX 3X5 - GNS 480 (CNX80) Interconnect .........................................................................................D-8
Figure D-6 GTX 325/335 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect .............................................................................D-9
Figure D-7 Single/Dual GTX 325/335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ..........................................................D-10
Figure D-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect ..................................................................................D-11
Figure D-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ...........................................................................D-13
Figure D-10 GTX 325/335/345 - GDL 88 Interconnect ........................................................................................D-14
Figure D-11 GTX 3X5 - GDL 88 Interconnect .....................................................................................................D-15
Figure D-12 GTX 345 - Traffic Sensor Interconnect ............................................................................................D-16
Figure D-13 GTX 345 - Single and Dual 400W/500W Series Interconnect ...........................................................D-20
Figure D-14 GTX 3X5 - Audio Interconnect ........................................................................................................D-21
Figure D-15 GTX 3X5 - Radio Altimeter Interconnect .........................................................................................D-22
Figure D-16 GTX 3X5 - AHRS/Heading Source Interconnect ...............................................................................D-23
Figure D-17 GTX 3X5 - Switches and OAT Probe Interconnect ...........................................................................D-24
Figure D-18 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Source Interconnect .........................................................................................D-25
Figure D-19 GTX 325 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect ............................................................................D-26
Figure D-20 GTX 335 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect ............................................................................D-27
Figure D-21 GTX 345/345R - Flight Stream Interconnect ....................................................................................D-28
Figure D-22 GTX 345 - MX20/GMX 200 Interconnect ........................................................................................D-29
Figure D-23 GTX 335 - GDU 620 Interconnect ...................................................................................................D-29
Figure D-24 Single GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect .................................................................D-30
Figure D-25 Dual GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ...................................................................D-31
Figure D-26 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ...........................................................D-33
Figure D-27 GTX 33D ES and GTX 345 - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect ...................................................D-35
Figure D-28 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - TPU-66A Traffic Display Interconnect ...........................................................D-37
Figure D-29 GTX 335/345 - GDU 700( )/1060 Interconnect ................................................................................D-39
Figure D-30 GTX 345D GPS Time Mark Input Interconnect ................................................................................D-40
Figure D-31 GTX 345 - GI 275 Interconnect .......................................................................................................D-41
Figure D-32 GTX 345 - GPS 175/GNC 355 Interconnect .....................................................................................D-41
Figure D-33 GTX 335 - GPS 175/GNC 355 Interconnect .....................................................................................D-41
Figure D-34 GTX 335/345 - GNSS Source Interconnect ......................................................................................D-41

Rev. 24 Page D-1
This section contains wiring interconnect details and examples for the connections necessary for the installation of the
GTX 33X and GTX 3X5 Series transponders.
Each figure contained in this section has notes that must be followed. These general notes apply to all of the figures
contained in this section.
 Unless specified differently, all wires are 24 AWG or larger.
 Power and ground connections are 22 AWG wire for run lengths less than 10 feet, if not, use 18 AWG.
 Use oversize contacts in the connector kit for wire sizes greater than 22 AWG.
 In 14 VDC installations, use two power pins and two ground pins for power and ground connections.
 In 28 VDC installations, use only one wire for power and ground connections.
 Antennas and associated cables are shown for reference only.
 In dual GTX transponder installations, each transponder must be grounded through separate ground terminal/
stud locations on the aircraft.
 If practical, power and ground wires should be routed separately for each transponder.
 Route grounds and wire separately to improve safety if there is a wiring or grounding system failure.
 Designations for ground connections:
S Shield Block Ground Airframe Ground
 Shield ground terminations to the connector backshell must be 3.0 inches or less in length.
 Ground terminations of interfaced equipment can vary. For information refer to the manufacturer’s installation
manual.
 HDSB Ethernet wiring must use 24 AWG aircraft grade category 5 Ethernet cable:
MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC Wire and Cable 10424
Carlisle IT 39204
 RS-232 and ARINC 429 ports shown are suggested port configurations.
 Installations can require alternate port configurations and are acceptable provided the equipment interfaces and
data formats are available on alternate ports.
 G1000 units are identified as units running software v15.xx and earlier.

Rev. 24 Page D-2
GTX 3X5
P3251 XPDR
AIRCRAFT POWER 21 22 AWG AVIONICS BUS (14‐28VDC)

AIRCRAFT POWER 42 22 AWG 3A
GTX 3X5 WITH GPS/SBAS only
XPDR Memory 3 5
GPS KEEP ALIVE 60 UNSWTCH BAT BUS (14‐28VDC)
3A
LIGHTING BUS HI 19 EXISTING LIGHTING BUS
LIGHTING BUS LO 40 4 5VDC, 14VDC, 28VDC, OR 5VAC
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 20 22 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 41 22 AWG
2 POWER CONTROL 38
POWER CONFIG 59
EXT SUPPRESSION 18 A/C SUPPRESSION BUS

s
CONFIG MODULE PWR 43 RED

CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE GND 23 BLK MODULE or
CONFIG MODULE DATA 22 YEL ALTITUDE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 1 WHT ENCODER
1
USB TYPE B
RECEPTACLE
USB VBUS POWER 44 RED VBUS
USB DATA HI 2 GRN D+
USB DATA LO 24 WHT D-
USB GROUND 45 BLK GND
S SHIELD
P325-XPDR XPDR
XPDR ANTENNA ANTENNA
GTX 3X5 WITH GPS/SBAS only
P325-GPS
GPS/SBAS
GPS ANTENNA ANTENNA
Figure D-1 GTX 3X5 Power Configuration Typical Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-3
NOTES
CONFIG MODULE REQUIRES WIRE HARNESS P/N: 325-00122-00. PRESSURE SENSOR/CONFIG MODULE
REQUIRES WIRE HARNESS P/N: 325-00421-00. MODULE WIRE HARNESSES ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE.
1 WIRE COLOR IN MODULE WIRE HARNESS DESIGNATES FUNCTION. CONNECT MODULE WIRE HARNESS
TO GTX 3X5 ACCORDING TO WIRE COLOR.
2 FOR DETAILS REFER TO SECTION 5.4.1.
GPS KEEP ALIVE IS RECOMMENDED FOR GPS INSTALLS. IF NOT CONNECTED GPS MAY TAKE UP TO
3 5 MINUTES TO OBTAIN A GPS FIX.
4 FOR LIGHTING BUS CONNECTIONS REFER TO SECTION 5.5.
GPS KEEP ALIVE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE UNSWITCHABLE BATTERY BUS (BUS DIRECTLY
5 CONNECTED TO THE BATTERY).
Figure D-1 GTX 3X5 Power Configuration Typical Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-4
GTX 345 P3251

XPDR
AIRCRAFT POWER 21 AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 3A (28VDC or 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 20 GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 41
POWER CONTROL 38
3
POWER CONFIG 59
CONFIG MODULE PWR 43 RED CONFIG

CONFIG MODULE GND 23 BLK MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 22 YEL
CONFIG MODULE CLK 1 WHT P8001 GTS 8XX 5
A429 RX 1A 27 23 A429 TX 2A
A429 RX 1B 28 24 A429 TX 2B
A429 TX 1A 5 25 A429 RX 2A
A429 TX 1B 6 26 A429 RX 2B
S S
P8002
CONFIG DISC 1 15 75 OPERATE/STANDBY
7 CONFIG DISC 2 16 74 SELF TEST SELECT 6
S S
EXTERNAL 18 48 EXTERNAL
s s SUPPRESSION
SUPPRESSION
1
P3471 GMA 1347

AUDIO OUT HI 46 19 AUDIO IN HI
8 AUDIO OUT LO 47 39 AUDIO IN LO
S
1P603 GIA 63 #1
RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
RS-232 GND 1 52 54 SIGNAL GROUND
S S
GIA 63 #2
2P603
A429 RX 2A 48 75 A429 TX 3A
A429 RX 2B 49 74 A429 TX 3B 4
S S
RS-232 RX 2 30 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 2 8 53 RS-232 RX 5
RS-232 GND 2 51 54 RS-232 GND 5
S S
2 P3252
RS-232 TX 4 5 63 RS-232 RX 8
RS-232 GND 4 15 64 RS-232 GND 8
S S
RS-422 A 11 27 RS-422 Port 3A

RS-422 B 12 28 RS-422 Port 3B
S S
Figure D-2 GTX 345 - G1000 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-5
NOTES
1 CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT SUPPRESSION BUS.
2 GDL 90 EMULATION - RS-422 FIS-B CONNECTION AND RS-232 ADS-B IN TRAFFIC.
3 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.1.
PROVIDES TRUE HEADING TO UNIT. USE ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 PORT. THIS MUST BE CONFIGURED
4
BY THE INSTALLER.
GTS 8XX SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE, FOR ALTERNATE EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SYSTEM OPTIONS, REFER TO
5
EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SENSORS.
GTX 345 PROVIDES AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF OPERATE/STANDBY BASED ON AIRBORNE STATUS.

6
GTX 3X5 INSTALL TOOL PROVIDES TRAFFIC SELF TEST DISCRETE FOR EXTERNAL TRAFFIC VALIDATION.
THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL INSTALLATION. FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT,

7
REFER TO APPLICABLE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS.
8 THIS AUDIO INTERFACE IS NOT NEEDED FOR G1000 NXi AND G2/3/5000 INSTALLATIONS.
THIS INTERCONNECT IS NOT NEEDED FOR G1000 NXi AND G2/3/5000 INSTALLATIONS. REFER TO
9
FIGURE D-24 THROUGH FIGURE D-27 FOR INFORMATION ON G1000 NXi AND G2/3/5000 SYSTEM.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-6
GTX 335 P3251 XPDR

AIRCRAFT POWER 21 AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 3A (28VDC or 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 41
POWER CONTROL 38
3 POWER CONFIG 59

CONFIG MODULE CLK 1 WHT P8001 GTS 8XX 2
A429 TX 1A 5 25 A429 RX 2A
A429 TX 1B 6 26 A429 RX 2B
S S
P8002
EXTERNAL 18 48 EXTERNAL
s s SUPPRESSION
SUPPRESSION
1
1P603 GIA 63 #1
RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
S S
GIA 63 #2
2P603
RS-232 RX 2 30 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 2 8 53 RS-232 RX 5
RS-232 GND 2 51 54 RS-232 GND 5
S S
NOTES
2 GTS 8XX IS THE ONLY SUPPORTED TRAFFIC SYSTEM THAT INTERFACES WITH THE GTX 335.
THIS INTERCONNECT IS NOT NEEDED FOR G1000 NXi AND G2/3/5000 INSTALLATIONS. REFER TO
4
FIGURE D-24 THROUGH FIGURE D-27 FOR INFORMATION ON G1000 NXi AND G2/3/5000 SYSTEM.

Rev. 24 Page D-7
GTX 335/345 P3251 P5 GNS 480 (CNX80) (#1)

RS-232 IN 3 29 22 RS-232 OUT 6
OPEN THIS SEGMENT
RS-232 OUT 3 7 WHEN 2 RS-232 IN 6
INSTALLING XPDR #2
RS-232 GND 3 50 42 RS-232 GND 6
S
EXT. STANDBY SELECT 14
XPDR 1
GTX 335/345 (#2) P3251

XPDR 2
RS-232 IN 3 29
RS-232 OUT 3 7 PANEL MOUNTED
1 P5 GNS 480 (CNX80) (#2)
RS-232 GND 3 50 DPDT SWITCH
S 22 RS-232 OUT 6
2 RS-232 IN 6
EXT. STANDBY SELECT 14 42 RS-232 GND 6
NOTES
WHEN INSTALLING A SECOND TRANSPONDER, A SWITCH MUST BE INSTALLED TO LET ONLY ONE
1 TRANSPONDER TO BE ACTIVE AT A TIME. SUITABLE DPDT SWITCHES: C&K 7000 SERIES P/N 7201SYZQE,
OR EQUIVALENT.
DASHED LINES AND AREAS REPRESENT TRANSPONDER #2 AND GNS 480 (CNX80) #2 INSTALLATION
2 DETAILS.
Figure D-4 GTX 335/GTX 345 - GNS 480 (CNX80) Interconnect
GNS 480 PROVIDING GPS POSITION TO GTX 3X5
P3251 P1
GTX 3X5 GNS 480 (CNX80)
RS232 #3 RX 29 6 RS-232 OUT 3
RS232 #3 GND 50 S
25 RS-232 GND 3
Figure D-5 GTX 3X5 - GNS 480 (CNX80) Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-8
GTX 325/335 P3251 XPDR

AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 21
(28VDC or 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 3A
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 41
POWER CONTROL 38
2
POWER CONFIG 59
P1001 GTN 6XX/7XX
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
S
AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE

GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS UNITS ONLY
ALTITUDE
ENCODER
RS-232 IN 1 31 RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 1 52 RS-232 OUT LO
S

CONFIG MODULE CLK 1 WHT 1
USB TYPE B
RECEPTACLE
s SHIELD
P325-XPDR
XPDR
XPDR ANT ANTENNA
NOTES
Figure D-6 GTX 325/335 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-9
GTX 325/335 P3251 P1001 GTN 6XX/7XX

(GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS
2 AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE
UNITS ONLY)
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
s s
GTX 325/335 (#2) P3251

2 AUDIO MUTE 37
RS-232 IN 3 29 7 RS-232 OUT 2

RS-232 OUT 3 7 26 RS-232 IN 2
RS-232 GND 3 50 45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
NOTES
DASHED AREAS INDICATE ADDITIONAL INTERCONNECTS FOR DUAL INSTALLATION AND ARE NOT
1 REQUIRED FOR SINGLE INSTALLATION.
2 AUDIO INHIBIT I/O PIN IS CONFIGURABLE. FOR DETAILS, REFER TO SECTION 5.7.
Figure D-7 Single/Dual GTX 325/335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-10
GTX 345 P3252 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX

ETHERNET IN 1A 7 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 24 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s
P3251
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
s s

AIRCRAFT P1001
AIRCRAFT GND 41
POWER CONTROL 38
2 POWER CONFIG 59
XPDR
AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 21 22 AWG
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 22 AWG 3A (28VDC or 14 VDC)
EXT SUPPRESSION 18 A/C SUPPRESSION BUS
AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI 46 AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 47 AUDIO IN LO
s
ALTITUDE
ENCODER
RS-232 IN 1 31 RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 1 52 RS-232 OUT LO
s

CONFIG MODULE CLK 1 WHT 1
USB TYPE B
RECEPTACLE
s SHIELD
P325-XPDR XPDR
XPDR ANT ANTENNA
Figure D-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-11
NOTES
Figure D-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Typical Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-12
SINGLE GTX 345 or GTX 345R with SINGLE GTN 6XX/7XX
GTX 345 P3252 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX

s s
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
s s
GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY
P3251 P1001
SINGLE GTX 345 or GTX 345R with DUAL GTN 6XX/7XXs
GTX 345 P3252 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX #1

s s P1001
P3251
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
s s
GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY
AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 2
P1002
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
6 ETHERNET IN 1A
7 ETHERNET IN 1B
s
P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX #2

9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
7 ETHERNET IN 1B
6 ETHERNET IN 1A
s
10 SYSTEM ID 1
s
NOTES
WHEN GTN 6XX/7XX IS THE ONLY INSTALLED GPS NAVIGATOR, OR GPS NAVIGATOR #1 IN A DUAL GPS
NAVIGATOR INSTALLATION, CONFIGURE GTN 6XX/7XX AS GTN #1 BY LEAVING SYSTEM ID (P1002-10) NOT
1 CONNECTED. WHEN THE GTN 6XX/7XX IS GPS NAVIGATOR #2 IN A DUAL GPS INSTALLATION, CONFIGURE
GTN #2 BY GROUNDING SYSTEM ID (P1002-10) TO THE SHIELD BLOCK.
2 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT FOR GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS UNITS ONLY.
Figure D-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-13
GTX 335/345 PROVIDING GPS POSITION TO GDL 88
GTX 335/345 P3251 P881 GDL 88

TIME MARK 1 PPS A OUT 4 22 TIME MARK A
TIME MARK 1 PPS A OUT 26 3 TIME MARK B
S S
RS232 #3 TX 7 26 RS232 #2 RX
RS232 #3 GND 50 45 RS232 #2 GND
S S
GDL 88 with GPS/SBAS PROVIDING GPS POSITION TO GTX 325/335/345
GTX 325/335/345 P3251 P881 GDL 88

RS232 #3 RX 29 7 RS232 #2 TX
RS232 #3 GND 50 45 RS232 #2 GND
S S
NOTES
1 ADS-B + FORMAT 2 SHOULD BE USED FOR BOTH INTERFACES.
Figure D-10 GTX 325/335/345 - GDL 88 Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-14
GTX 3X5 P3251 P881 GDL 88
RS232 #3 RX 29 6 RS232 OUT 3

RS232 #3 TX 7 25 RS232 IN 3
RS232 #3 GND 50 44 RS232 GND 3
EXT SUPPRESSION 18 59 SUPPRESSION OUT

AIRCRAFT
SUPPRESSION BUS
NOTES
1 CONFIGURE THE GTX 3X5 RS-232 PORT FOR REMOTE FORMAT 1
CONFIGURE THE GDL 88 RS-232 PORT FOR GTX MODE C #1/#2 WHEN CONNECTING TO A GTX 325, GTX MODE S #1/
2 #2 WHEN CONNECTING TO A GTX 335/345
3 GPS DATA IS NOT INCLUDED ON THIS INTERFACE
Figure D-11 GTX 3X5 - GDL 88 Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-15
TRAFFIC
HONEYWELL HONEYWELL L3 COMM GARMIN SENSOR
KTA 870/810 TPU-66A SKY 899 SKY 497 GTS 8XX (ARINC 429)
GTX 345 KTA 970/910 10 11 1 12
8
P3251 P10 P66A1A P66A1B P1 P1 P8001 P8002
A429 IN 1A 27 54 -- 30 42 34 23 -- A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 55 -- 16 43 33 24 -- A429 TX B
s 14
A429 OUT 1A 5 -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- A429 RX A
A429 OUT 1B 6 -- -- -- -- -- 26 -- A429 RX B
s
EXTERNAL
18 68 13 -- 93 89 -- 48 EXTERNAL
SUPPRESSION
s SUPPRESSION
TRFC TEST 15 2 20 -- 19 85 -- 74 TEST MODE
4 TRFC STBY 16 23 17 -- 21 82 -- 75 STBY/OPERATE
20 67 -- 89 (90) 92 (91) -- 58 AUDIO HI

6 NC 21 68 -- 91 90 -- 59 AUDIO LO
3
-- -- -- 24 88 -- -- SQUAT SWITCH
13 NC -- 19 -- -- -- -- -- A735/BCAS
-- 11 -- -- -- -- -- ON/OFF
Figure D-12 GTX 345 - Traffic Sensor Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 24 Page D-16
TRAFFIC
HONEYWELL SENSOR
KMH 820/880 (ARINC 429)
GTX 345 KMH 920/980
1
8
P3251 P10
A429 IN 1A 27 54 A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 55 A429 TX B
s
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
18 68
SUPPRESSION SUPPRESSION
s
TRFC TEST 15 2 TEST MODE

4 TRFC STBY 16 23 STBY/OPERATE
EXISTING WIRING 20 AUDIO HIGH

TO AUDIO PANEL 21 AUDIO LOW
9 22 ADV INHIBIT
116 TERRAIN WARN
2 AUDIO MUTE 58 117 TERRAIN CAUTION
OTHER TERRAIN
ALERTING ANNUNCIATOR(S)
SYSTEMS
TRAFFIC
AVIDYNE SENSOR
TAS600 (RS-232)
GTX 345 RYAN 9900BX
8
P3251 P1
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
18 7
SUPPRESSION SUPPRESSION
s
3 AUDIO HI
6 NC 4 AUDIO LO
P3252
5 RS-232 #4 RX 10 20 RS-232 #3 TX
RS-232 #4 TX 5 22 RS-232 #3 RX
RS-232 #4 GND 15 21 RS-232 #3 GND
s
2 J1 7
TCAD SL (SENSE) 14 11 GEAR POSITION

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 24 Page D-17
Garmin
GTS 8XX
(HSDB)
GTX 345 P8001 1 12
P3251
EXTERNAL
18 48 EXTERNAL
SUPPRESSION
s SUPPRESSION
58 AUDIO HI
6 NC 59 AUDIO LO
P3252 P8002
ETHERNET IN 1A 7 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 53 ETHERNET OUT B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 55 ETHERNET IN B
s s 14
NOTES
FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIRED CONFIGURATIONS FOR THE GTX 345R AND AN EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SENSOR IN G950/
1 1000 EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT, REFER TO THE STC INSTALLATION MANUAL.
2 ANY CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT DISCRETE CAN BE USED IF THIS DISCRETE IS ALREADY IN USE.
CONFIGURE THE TRC 899 “WEIGHT ON WHEELS” SWITCH AS “ACTIVE LOW.” FOR COMPLETE CONFIGURATION
3 INFORMATION REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION.
4 CONFIGURABLE FOR P3251 ONLY.
5 NON-CONFIGURABLE PORT. ONLY RS-232 PORT 4 CAN BE USED FOR THIS CONNECTION.
IF THE EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SENSOR WAS INTERFACED TO THE AUDIO PANEL, THESE WIRES SHOULD BE CAPPED
6 AND STOWED.
THIS DISCRETE IS TO DRIVE THE SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM. FOR SPECIFIC G950/G1000
7 INSTALLATIONS, THIS DISCRETE IS NOT NECESSARY TO CONNECT TO THE GTX 345 UNLESS THE GTX 345 HAS A
RADAR ALTIMETER INPUT OR HAT IS AVAILABLE.
8 FOR DETAILS REFER TO THE AUDIO PANEL INTERFACE.
IF THE KMH HAS THE COMBINED TAS/EGPWS, THE AUDIO WIRING REMAINS CONNECTED. THE TERRAIN
ANNUNCIATOR SIGNALS DRIVE THE AUDIO MUTE INPUT TO THE GTX WITH THE APPLICATION OF TWO ADDITIONAL
DIODES, P/N: 1N4007. IF OTHER SYSTEMS INTERFACE TO THE ADV INHIBIT (P10-22), THEY SHOULD BE REMOVED
9 FROM P100-22 AND INTERFACED TO THE GTX AS SHOWN. IF THE EGPWS IS NOT ENABLED, THE AUDIO WIRING
CAN BE CAPPED AND STOWED AND THE TERRAIN ANNUNCIATOR SIGNALS WITH THE DIODES DO NOT NEED TO BE
CONNECTED TO THE GTX AUDIO MUTE.
10 GTS A429, TRFC TEST, AND TRFC STBY INTERFACES ARE NOT REQUIRED FOR G1000 NXi/GX000 INSTALLATIONS.

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 24 Page D-18
IF THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM IS A GTS 820, GTS 850, OR GTS 8X5, THE GTS TRAFFIC DISPLAY DESTINATION
11 PORT MUST BE CONFIGURED TO A DIFFERENT PORT THAN THE TRANSPONDER COMMUNICATION
PORTS.
ADDITIONAL INTERFACES TO THE EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SYSTEM NOT IDENTIFIED IN THE INTERCONNECT,
12 SUCH AS ALTITUDE/ HEADING DATA, TA DISPLAY VALID DISCRETES, AND CONFIGURATION STRAPS,
SHOULD REMAIN CONNECTED FOR PROPER TAS/TCAS OPERATION.
THE TA/RA BLOCK TRANSFER PROGRAM PIN MUST BE OPEN TO CONFIGURE THE TPU-66A DISPLAY BUS
13 OUTPUT FOR ARINC 735 PROTOCOL.
GTS 8XX CAN BE CONNECTED VIA HSDB OR ARINC 429. ALL REQUIRED WIRING FOR THOSE INSTALLS IN
14 THEIR RESPECTIVE DRAWINGS.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 24 Page D-19
SINGLE GNS 400W/500W SERIES

P4001/
GTX 345 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W
RS-232 IN 2 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 51
s
ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A

ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s
P4001/
P50XX
AUDIO MUTE 37 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 1
DUAL GNS 400W/500W SERIES

P4001/
GTX 345 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W #1
RS-232 IN 2 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 51
s

s
P4001/
P5001
GNS 400W/500W #2
48 ARINC 429 IN 1A
49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
RS-232 IN 3 29 56 RS232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 3 7 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50
s
P4001/
P50XX
1
2
NOTES
1 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT USED WITH 400S/500W SERIES UNITS ONLY.
2 CONNECTION CAN BE MADE TO NAVIGATOR #1 IN LIEU OF NAVIGATOR #2.
Figure D-13 GTX 345 - Single and Dual 400W/500W Series Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-20
GTX 3X5 GARMIN

AUDIO
PANEL
SL 10/15 GMA 35
SERIES
GMA 340 GMA 347
GMA 350 (ANALOG)
P3251 BOTTOM J1 P3471 P3501
2
AUDIO OUT HI 46 T 31 19 31 AUDIO IN [HI]
AUDIO OUT LO 47 GND LUG 32 39 32 AUDIO IN [LO]
3
EXTERNAL AUDIO INHIBIT DISCRETE (GND)– CONNECT TO HIGH PRIORITY

AUDIO MUTE 37
DEVICES (TAWS, ETC.)
GTX 3X5 BENDIX/KING PS ENGINEERING

AUDIO
PANEL
KMA 24H PMA 6000
KMA 24
-70/-71
KMA 26 KMA 28 PMA 8000
PMA 7000 (ANALOG)
P3251 P241 P241 P261 J1(Bottom) J1 (Bottom) BOTTOM
2
AUDIO OUT HI 46 T 10 14 T 31 T AUDIO IN [HI]
AUDIO OUT LO 47 GND LUG 14 31 GND LUG 32 GND LUG AUDIO IN [LO]
3
EXTERNAL AUDIO INHIBIT DISCRETE (GND)– CONNECT TO HIGH PRIORITY

AUDIO MUTE 37
DEVICES (TAWS, ETC.)
NOTES
SEE THE GENERAL NOTES IDENTIFIED AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS APPENDIX FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS
1 AND REQUIREMENTS.
IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES
NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUT, AUDIO FROM THE GTX 3X5 MUST BE MIXED
2 WITH AN EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH
DEVICE. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390Ω ¼ W.
THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING
3 RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED. SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT ONE END (WITH
LEADS LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES) AND LEFT FLOATING AT THE OTHER END.
Figure D-14 GTX 3X5 - Audio Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-21
GTX 3X5 RADIO

HONEYWELL GARMIN FREE FLIGHT
KRA 405B GRA 55/5500 RA-4500
ALTIMETER
(ARINC 429)
P3251 P1 J5501 P1
A429 IN 1A 27 B 52 12 A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 C 55 1 11 A429 TX B
s
NOTES
1 ONLY APPLICABLE TO FREE FLIGHT RA-4500 P/N 84560-X2-XXXX.
Figure D-15 GTX 3X5 - Radio Altimeter Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-22
HEADING
GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN
GTX 3X5 GI 275 GRS 77 GRS 79 GAD 42 GDU 620 GNS 4XX/ 700( )/1060
SOURCE
5XX (ARINC 429)
P3251
P1 P771 P791 P421 P6202 P4001/P5001 P4
A429 IN 1A 27 16 12 49 13 3 46 77 A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 55 27 50 14 20 47 78 A429 TX B
s s
HEADING
ASPEN AVIDYNE COLLINS HONEYWELL SANDEL SANDEL SOURCE
GTX 3X5 EFD1000 EXP5000 AHC-85E EFIS 40/50 SN3500 SN3308 (ARINC 429)
700-00006-() (SG 465)
P3251 P1 P732 P1 P4652B P2 P3
A429 IN 1A 27 26 22 16 47 30 11 A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 27 21 14 20 15 29 A429 TX B
s
Figure D-16 GTX 3X5 - AHRS/Heading Source Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-23
TRAFFIC
GTX 3X5 P3251 CANCEL
AUDIO CANCEL 37
IDENT
EXT IDENT 36
PRI
AIR DATA
AIR DATA SELECT 58
SELECT
2 ALT
SQUAT SW ITCH 57 3
XPDR 1
EXT STANDBY 14
XPDR
SELECT
XPDR 2
OAT PROBE IN 3
OAT PROBE OUT 25 1
NOTES
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE PROBE STANDARD 2-WIRE THERMOCOUPLE WITH 1 MICRO-AMP PER
1 DEGREE KELVIN RESPONSE. SUITABLE MODELS ARE: EDMO 655 AND DAVTRON C307PS.
2 DISCRETE I/O PINS ARE CONFIGURABLE. REFER TO SECTION 6.5.
THE SQUAT SWITCH INPUT CAN BE USED TO CONTROL AIR/GROUND STATUS. THE INPUT SENSE
3
CONFIGURATION IS DESCRIBED IN TABLE 6-8 .
AUDIO CANCEL AND TRAFFIC AUDIO CANCEL ARE SUPPORTED. TRAFFIC AUDIO CANCEL IS
4
RECOMMENDED FOR ALERT CANCEL/ACKNOWLEDGE WHEN USING THE GTX 345.
Figure D-17 GTX 3X5 - Switches and OAT Probe Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-24
ENCODING
ALTIMETER
SANDIA
SAE5-35 (GRAY CODE)
GTX 3X5
P3251
ALTITUDE D4 13 1 ALTITUDE D4
ALTITUDE A1 10 2 ALTITUDE A1
ALTITUDE B1 11 5 ALTITUDE B1
ALTITUDE C1 12 11 ALTITUDE C1
ALT. GROUND 56 6 ALT. COMMON
SW. PWR. OUT 39 14 POWER
5 15 GROUND
1
ALTITUDE
3
ENCODER
ACK ICARUS SANDIA SHADIN SHADIN TRANS-CAL (RS-232)
Technologies Instruments SAE5-35 8800T F/ADC-200 IA-RS232-X
A-30 3000 F/ADC-2000 SSD-120
DB15 P3 (DB9) J5 DB15 J2 DB9
6 RS-232 2 IN 30 7 (14) 2 1 (2) 7 6 4 (9) RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 2 GND 51 SHELL SHELL 5 15 9 5 RS-232 OUT LO
s 1
2 CONFIG.
4
2 7 JUMPERS
8
AIR DATA
B&D Bendix/King Bendix/King SHADIN SHADIN COMPUTER
(SPIRENT) HONEYWELL HONEYWELL ADC 2000 ADC 2000 (ARINC 429)
90004-003 KDC 281 KDC 481 (MS CONN)
P2811 P4811 J1 J2 (DB15)
A429 IN 1A 27 27 5 U 40 7 A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 9 6 i 22 8 A429 TX B
s
GARMIN
ALTITUDE
GDU 620 700( )/1060 GDC 72 GDC 74( ) GSU 75( ) SOURCE
P6202 P4 P791 P741 P751
A429 IN 1A
A429 IN 1B 3 77 21 29 21 A429 TX A
s
20 78 22 30 22 A429 TX B
Figure D-18 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Source Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-25
NOTES
1 USE 1N4007 DIODE FOR ENCODER POWER.
2 TO GTX #2 IF INSTALLED. RS-232 SPLICE MUST BE MADE ADJACENT TO GTX #1 CONNECTOR AS SHOWN.
CONFIGURE ENCODER OUTPUT TO “TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS” FORMAT IF USING RS-232 SOFTWARE
3
METHOD.
4 LIMIT STRAP LENGTH TO SPECIFIED LENGTH IN THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL.
5 POWERING SAE 5-35 THROUGH THE SWITCHED OUTPUT IS OPTIONAL.
6 ALTITUDE MAY BE INPUT ON RS-232 IN 1, RS-232 IN 2, OR RS-232 IN 3.
Figure D-18 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Source Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2
GNS 400W/500W PROVIDING GPS AND HAT DATA TO GTX 325

P4001/
GTX 325 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W
RS-232 #2 RX 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 #2 TX 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 #2 GND 51
s s
Figure D-19 GTX 325 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-26
SINGLE GNS 400W/500W SERIES

P4001/
GTX 335 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W
RS-232 #2 RX 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 #2 TX 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 #2 GND 51
s s
TIS-A SELECT 15 11 DISCRETE OUT

ARINC 429 IN 1A
ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1B
ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49
s s
DUAL GNS 400W/500W SERIES

P4001/
GTX 335 P3251 P5001 GNS 400W/500W #1
RS-232 #2 RX 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 #2 TX 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 #2 GND 51
s s
s s
11 DISCRETE OUT 1
P4001/
GNS 400W/500W #2
P5001
48 ARINC 429 IN 1A
49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
TIS-A SELECT 15 11 DISCRETE OUT 1
RS-232 #3 RX 29 56 RS232 OUT 1

RS-232 #3 TX 7 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 #3 GND 50
s s
NOTES
1 CONNECTION CAN BE MADE TO NAVIGATOR #1 IN LIEU OF NAVIGATOR #2.
Figure D-20 GTX 335 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-27
GTX 345/345R GARMIN

P3251 P301
FS 110/210
RS-232 #3 RX 29 6 RS-232 #3 TX
RS-232 #3 GND 50
s s
P3252
RS-422 TX A 11 4 RS-422 RX A
RS-422 TX B 12 10 RS-422 RX B
s s
1 BT LINK
5 AIRCRAFT POWER
1A
15 GROUND
AIRCRAFT
GROUND
NOTES
1 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN.
Figure D-21 GTX 345/345R - Flight Stream Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-28
GTX 345 P3252 MX20/GMX 200

P2001
RS-422 A 11 11 RS-422 PORT 4A
RS-422 B 12 26 RS-422 PORT 4B
S S
29 RS-232 IN 4
1
9 PORT CONFIG HI
NOTES
GMX 200 ONLY: JUMPER MUST BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN TO CONFIGURE PORT 4 FOR RS-422
1 OPERATION. IF PORT 4 IS USED AS AN RS-422 PORT, RS-232 PORT 4 CANNOT BE USED.
Figure D-22 GTX 345 - MX20/GMX 200 Interconnect
P4001/
GTX 335 P3251 GDU 620 #1
P5001
TIS-A SELECT 15 26 DISCRETE OUT

s
S
P4001/
P5001
GDU 620 #2
26 DISCRETE OUT
4 ARINC 429 IN 7A
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B
s
Figure D-23 GTX 335 - GDU 620 Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-29
GTX 3X5R P3251 1P603 GIA 6X #1

RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
1P603 GIA 6X #2
RS-232 RX 2 30 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 2 8 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
P8002 GTS 8XX

EXT SUPPRESSION 18 48 EXT SUPPRESSION
s s
1
POWER CONFIG 59 OPTIONAL
POWER CONTROL 38
REMOTE IDENT = GND
3
EXT IDENT 36
2 4
P3252 P10501 GDU #2 105X MFD
s s
NOTES
2 GTX 345R ONLY
3 OPTIONAL IDENT SWITCH
GDU SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE ONLY. GTX 345R ETHERNET MUST BE CONNECTED SUCH THAT ALL DEVICES
4 BETWEEN THE GTX 345R AND A GDU ARE HSDB 2 COMPATIBLE. CONTACT GARMIN PRODUCT FOR DEVICES THAT
ARE HSDB 2 COMPATIBLE.
REFER TO FIGURE D-12 FOR INTERFACING THE GTX 345R DIRECT WITH A TAS/TCAS TRAFFIC UNIT USING ARINC
429 AND DISCRETE TRAFFIC TEST AND STANDBY CONNECTIONS. WHEN BOTH A GTX 345R AND GTS TRAFFIC
5 SYSTEM ARE CONNECTED VIA ETHERNET TO THE NXi OR GX000 SYSTEM, THE GTX 345R TRAFFIC ARINC 429 AND
DISCRETE CONNECTIONS, EXCLUDING EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION, ARE NOT USED.
Figure D-24 Single GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-30
GTX 3X5R #1
2 4
P3252 P10501
GDU #2 105X MFD
s s
P3251 1P603 GIA 6X #1

RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
P8002 GTS 8XX

s s
POWER CONFIG 59
OPTIONAL
POWER CONTROL 38
REMOTE IDENT = GND
3
EXT IDENT 36
GTX 3X5R #2 P3251 1
EXT IDENT 36
INSTALL ID SELECT 13
EXT SUPPRESSION 18
s
1P603 GIA 6X #2
RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
POWER CONFIG 59
POWER CONTROL 38
2 4
P3252 P10501 GDU #2 105X MFD
s s
Figure D-25 Dual GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-31
NOTES
2 GTX 345R ONLY
3 OPTIONAL IDENT SWITCH
GDU SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE ONLY. GTX 345R ETHERNET MUST BE CONNECTED SUCH THAT ALL
4 DEVICES BETWEEN THE GTX 345R AND A GDU ARE HSDB 2 COMPATIBLE. CONTACT GARMIN PRODUCT
FOR DEVICES THAT ARE HSDB 2 COMPATIBLE.
REFER TO FIGURE D-12 FOR INTERFACING THE GTX 345R DIRECT WITH A TAS/TCAS TRAFFIC UNIT USING
ARINC 429 AND DISCRETE TRAFFIC TEST AND STANDBY CONNECTIONS. WHEN BOTH A GTX 345R AND
5 GTS TRAFFIC SYSTEM ARE CONNECTED VIA ETHERNET TO THE NXi OR GX000 SYSTEM, THE GTX 345R
TRAFFIC ARINC 429 AND DISCRETE CONNECTIONS, EXCLUDING EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION, ARE NOT
USED.
WHEN TWO GTX 345R UNITS ARE INSTALLED, ONLY ONE GTX CAN BE THE ADS-B IN SOURCE. ADS-B IN
6 FUNCTIONALITY MUST BE DISABLED BY CONFIGURATION IN ONE OF THE GTX UNITS.
Figure D-25 Dual GTX 3X5R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-32
GTX 335R (#1) P3251 1P603 GIA 6X #1

RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
P8002 GTS 8XX

s s
POWER CONFIG 59 OPTIONAL
POWER CONTROL 38 REMOTE IDENT = GND

2
EXT IDENT 36
GTX 345R (#2) P3251 1
EXT IDENT 36
EXT SUPPRESSION 18
s
POWER CONFIG 59
POWER CONTROL 38
1P603 GIA 6X #2
RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
3
P3252 P10501
GDU #2 105X MFD
s s
Figure D-26 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-33
NOTES
2 OPTIONAL IDENT SWITCH.
SUPPORT FOR DEVICES THAT ARE HSDB 2 COMPATIBLE.
USED.
Figure D-26 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-34
GTX 33D ES (#1) P3301 1P603 GIA 6X #1

RS-232 RX 1 22 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 23 53 RS-232 RX 5
SIGNAL GROUND 51 54 SIGNAL GROUND
s s
P8002 GTS 8XX

s s
OPTIONAL
REMOTE IDENT = GND

2
EXTERNAL IDENT SELECT 12
GTX 345R (#2) P3251 1
EXT IDENT 36
EXT SUPPRESSION 18
s
POWER CONFIG 59
POWER CONTROL 38
1P603 GIA 6X #2
RS-232 RX 1 31 55 RS-232 TX 5
RS-232 TX 1 9 53 RS-232 RX 5
s s
3
P3252 P10501 GDU #2 105X MFD
s s
Figure D-27 GTX 33D ES and GTX 345 - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-35
NOTES
CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT SUPPRESSION BUS. REFER TO THE GTX 33 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR
1 KNOWN DME MODELS THAT ARE INCOMPATIBLE.
2 OPTIONAL IDENT SWITCH.
SUPPORT FOR DEVICES THAT ARE HSDB 2 COMPATIBLE.
USED.
Figure D-27 GTX 33D ES and GTX 345 - G1000 NXi and GX000 Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-36
GTN CONTROL OF GTX 335R, GTX 345R, TPU-66A, AND ARINC TRAFFIC DISPLAY
GTX 335R #1 GTN 6XX/7XX #1

P3251 P1001
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1 14
9 RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
s s
P1002
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ARINC TRAFFIC 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
DISPLAY 6 ETHERNET IN 1A 10
7 ETHERNET IN 1B
(A735/BCAS)
s
A429 IN B
A429 IN A 8
P1002
GTN 6XX/7XX #2
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
7 ETHERNET IN 1B 10
6 ETHERNET IN 1A
GTX 345R #2 P3251 s
4
A429 OUT 1A 5 10 SYSTEM ID 1
7 A429 OUT 1B 6 s
s
P3252
10 ETHERNET IN 1B 2 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 3A 15
s s P1001
P3251
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
14
9 RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
s s
GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY
12 AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 2
HONEYWELL
P66A1B TPU-66A 5
A429 IN 1A 27 30 A429 TA/RA TX 1A
11
A429 IN 1B 28 16 A429 TA/RA TX 1B
s
P66A1A
EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION 18 13 SUPPRESSION
s
TRFC TEST 15 20 FUNCTIONAL TEST

13 17 ADVISORY INHIBIT 1
TRFC STBY 16
67 SPEAKER HI
6 NC
68 SPEAKER LO
3 NC 19 A735/BCAS
11 ON/OFF
Figure D-28 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - TPU-66A Traffic Display Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-37
NOTES
WHEN THE GTN 6XX/7XX IS THE ONLY INSTALLED GPS NAVIGATOR, OR GPS NAVIGATOR #1 IN A DUAL GPS
NAVIGATOR INSTALLATION, CONFIGURE GTN 6XX/7XX AS GTN #1 BY LEAVING SYSTEM ID (P1002-10) NOT
1 CONNECTED. WHEN THE GTN 6XX/7XX IS GPS NAVIGATOR #2 IN A DUAL GPS INSTALLATION, CONFIGURE
GTN #2 BY GROUNDING SYSTEM ID (P1002-10) TO THE SHIELD BLOCK.
2 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT FOR GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS UNITS ONLY.
THE TA/RA BLOCK TRANSFER PROGRAM PIN (A735/BCAS) MUST BE OPEN TO CONFIGURE THE TPU-66A
3
DISPLAY BUS OUTPUT FOR ARINC 735 PROTOCOL.
THE GTX 345 SHOULD BE INTERFACED TO THE AUDIO PANEL FOR TRAFFIC AUDIO ALERTS. REFER TO
4
FIGURE D-14 .
ADDITIONAL INTERFACES TO THE TPU-66A NOT IDENTIFIED IN THIS INTERCONNECT, SUCH AS ALTITUDE/
5 HEADING DATA, TA DISPLAY VALID DISCRETES, AND CONFIGURATION STRAPS, SHOULD REMAIN
CONNECTED FOR PROPER TCAS OPERATION.
IF THE TPU-66A WAS INTERFACED TO THE AUDIO PANEL, THESE WIRES SHOULD BE CAPPED AND
6
STOWED. THE GTX 345R SHOULD BE THE ONLY SOURCE OF TRAFFIC AUDIO ALERTS.
CONFIGURE THE GTX 345R ARINC OUTPUT TO THE A429 BCAS FORMAT WHEN INTERFACING WITH A
7 HONEYWELL BCAS DISPLAY. CONFIGURE THIS OUTPUT TO THE A735 FORMAT WHEN INTERFACING TO
AN ARINC 735 TRAFFIC DISPLAY.
8 REFER TO THE TRAFFIC DISPLAY MANUFACTURER DOCUMENTATION FOR PIN NUMBERS.
9 GTX 3X5 RS-232 PORT 1, 2, OR 3 MAY BE USED.
10 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.
11 ANY AVAILABLE GTX 3X5 A429 INPUT MAY BE USED.
ANY CONFIGURABLE GTX 3X5 DISCRETE INPUT PIN MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.7 FOR
12
CONFIGURABLE INPUT PINS.
13 CONFIGURABLE GTX 3X5 P3251 DISCRETE OUTPUT PINS ONLY.
14 ANY AVAILABLE GTN RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED.
15 ANY AVAILABLE GTN 1 OR GTN 2 ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.
THE GTN PROVIDES GTX 335R AND 345R TRANSPONDER CONTROL, GTX 345R ADS-B IN CONTROL,
TPU-66A OPERATE/STANDBY/TEST CONTROL AND ARINC TRAFFIC DISPLAY CONTROL. GTN SOFTWARE
16
VERSION 6.50 AND LATER REQUIRED. GTX 3X5 MAIN SOFTWARE VERSION 2.50 AND LATER AND GTX 3X5
ADS-B SOFTWARE VERSION 3.00 AND LATER REQUIRED.
Figure D-28 GTX 335R/GTX 345R - TPU-66A Traffic Display Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 24 Page D-38
GDU 700( )/1060

PFD/MFD GTX 3X5
P4
GTX345 GTX 335
1 TIS/TAS STANDBY
(~DISCRETE OUT 9*) 51
P3252 P3251
6 - ETHERNET OUT A
GDU 700( )/1060 1 - ETHERNET OUT B
PFD/MFD 2 7 - ETHERNET IN A
2 - ETHERNET IN B
s
P4
1 TIS/TAS STANDBY
(~DISCRETE OUT 9*) 51 - 15 TIS-A STANDBY/OPERATE
A 11 - 5 A
~ARINC 429 IN 11 ARINC 429 OUT
B 31 - 6 B
s
(OPTIONAL)
A 53 - 27 A ARINC 429 IN
~ARINC 429 OUT 1 3
B 73 - 28 B (ALTITUDE – LOW SPEED)
s
AHRS Source
GDU 700/1060
INTEGRATED
ADAHRS
P4
(OPTIONAL)
A 77 - 48 A ARINC 429 IN
~ ARINC 429 OUT (ATTITUDE/HEADING –
B 78 - 49 B
s HIGH SPEED)
NOTES
TIS/TAS STANDBY DISCRETE CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF THE GDU IS CONFIGURED FOR “CONTROL
1 TRAFFIC.”
2 ANY AVAILABLE GDU ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.
ALTITUDE, TEMPERATURE, HEADING, SPEED, AND SELECTED COURSE INFORMATION MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE
3 GDU TO THE TRANSPONDER.
Figure D-29 GTX 335/345 - GDU 700( )/1060 Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-39
GPS Source
GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN
GNS 4XXW/ GNS 480 GIA 6XW/ GTN 6XX/7XX
5XXW GIA 64H
GTX 345D
P3251 P5001 P1 J603 P1001
TIME MARK A 4 16 19 67 3 TIME MARK A
TIME MARK B 26 - 17 - 22 TIME MARK B
s
GPS Source
GARMIN GARMIN
GIA 64E GPS 175/GNC
355
GTX 345D
P3251 J605 P1751
TIME MARK A 4 65 4 TIME MARK A
TIME MARK B 26 66 26 TIME MARK B
s
Figure D-30 GTX 345D GPS Time Mark Input Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-40
GTX 345 GI 275

P3252 P2751
s s
Figure D-31 GTX 345 - GI 275 Interconnect
GTX 345 P3252 P1751 GPS 175/GNC 355
ETHERNET OUT 1 A 6 11 A
ETHERNET IN
B 1 33 B
A 7 10 A
ETHERNET IN 1 ETHERNET OUT
B 2 32 B
s s
Figure D-32 GTX 345 - GPS 175/GNC 355 Interconnect
GTX 335 P3251 P1751 GPS 175/GNC 355
RS-232 IN 3 31 9 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 GND 3 52 52 RS-232 GND 1
s
Figure D-33 GTX 335 - GPS 175/GNC 355 Interconnect
ARINC 743A GNSS

GTX 335/345 P3251 SOURCE
A429 IN 1A 27 A429 OUT A
A429 IN 1B 28 A429 OUT B
S S
NOTES
GTX 3X5 SOFTWARE P/N 006-B1607-0P (MAIN v2.85) OR LATER IS RECOMMENDED. REFER TO TABLE C-2 FOR
1 ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
2 ANY AVAILABLE GTX 3X5 ARINC 429 INPUT PORT CAN BE USED.
Figure D-34 GTX 335/345 - GNSS Source Interconnect

Rev. 24 Page D-41
CS-ACNS Compliance Matrix
Appendix E CS-ACNS Compliance Matrix

E.1 Elementary Surveillance (ELS) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................E-1
E.2 Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) ............................................................................................................................................................................................E-8
E.3 ADS-B ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... E-11
E.1 Elementary Surveillance (ELS)

The information in this section is applicable to GTX 335/335R/335D/335DR/345/345R/345D/345DR units.
Table E-1 ELS
CS-ACNS SECTION CS-ACNS ITEM DESCRIPTION COMPLIANCE SUMMARY

Provided that the differences listed in Appendix
D have also been addressed, then previous
compliance declarations with JAA TGL 13
CS ACNS.D.ELS.001 Applicability Revision1 (Certification of Mode S Transponder Not applicable for the new GTX 335/335R/345/345R units.
Systems for Elementary Surveillance)
supplemented with the additional assessments is
another Acceptable Means of Compliance.
a) The transponder(s) is (are) an approved
The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units are TSO Class 1 Level 2
level 2 or greater Mode S transponder(s)
transponder with Level C (Major) Failure classification with
with Elementary Surveillance and
SI mode capability.
Surveillance Identifier (SI) capability.
The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units do not support an
b) The transponder(s) of aircraft that have
interface with an ACAS II system therefore the Resolution
ACAS II installed is (are) ACAS compatible.
Advisory (BDS 3,0) is transmitted as all zeros.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.010 Transponder
Characteristics c) The peak pulse power available at the
antenna end of the transmission line of the
transponder is more than 125 W (21 dBW) The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units meets the minimum
and not more than 500 W (27 dBW) for and maximum transmit power level, 125 W (21 dBW) and
aircraft that operate at altitudes exceeding 500 W (27 dBW), respectively, when installed according to
4,570 m (15 000 ft) or with a maximum the installation manual.
cruising speed exceeding 90 m/s
(175 knots).

Rev. 24 Page E-1

d) The peak pulse power available at the
antenna end of the transmission line of the
The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units are a Class 1
CS ACNS.D.ELS.010 Transponder transponder is more than 70 W (18.5 dBW)
transponder meeting the higher requirements identified in
Characteristics and not more than 500 W (27 dBW) for
ACNS.D.ELS.010.c, when installed according to the
(continued) aircraft operating at or below 4,570 m
installation manual.
(15000 ft) with a maximum cruising
airspeed of 90 m/s (175 knots) or less.
a) The surveillance system provides the
The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units provide the following:
following data in the Mode S replies:
1. Mode A code provided in DF=5 and 21 replies.
1. The Mode A Code in the range 0000 to Mode A Code in the range 0000 to 7777 using either
7777 (Octal) the panel mount push-buttons or a compatible control
device e.g., GTN 6XX/7XX, GX000, GNS 480.
2. The pressure altitude corresponding to
within plus or minus 38 m (125 ft), on a
95 percent probability basis, with the
pressure-altitude information (referenced to 2. Altitude is reported in DF=4 and 20 replies. The
the standard pressure setting of 1013.25 transponder transmits altitude in 100 ft increments
CS ACNS.D.ELS.015 Data Transmission hectopascals), used on board the aircraft to from -1,000 to 62,700ft or 25ft increments from -
adhere to the assigned flight profile. The 1,000 to 50,175ft depending on the source data.
pressure altitude ranges from minus 300 m
(1,000 ft) to the maximum certificated
altitude of aircraft plus 1,500 m (5,000 ft).
3. CA field in DF=11 or FS field in DF = 4, 5, 20, and 21
replies includes airborne state. The GTX units
automatically transition the aircraft state from
airborne to ground-borne and report surface mode
3. On-the-ground status information.
broadcasting ground-only information such as aircraft
length and width. If the aircraft airborne state is
unknown, it will report AIRBORNE with additional
details in DF 11 with CA code of 6 or 7.

Rev. 24 Page E-2

4. The GTX units provide BDS register 20 (Aircraft
Identification) as configured by the installer, or
4. The Aircraft Identification as specified in
changed by the flight crew via panel mount push-
Item 7 of the ICAO flight plan or the aircraft
buttons or a compatible control device. BDS register
registration.
21 (Aircraft Registration) is provided as a constant
message.
5. FS (Flight Status) field in DF=4, 5, 20, and 21 replies
includes SPI/IDENT indication. SPI/IDENT is
5. Special Position Indication (SPI).
commanded by flight crew via discrete input, panel
mount push button, or a compatible control device.
6. Emergency status (Emergency, Radio
communication failure, Unlawful 6. Emergency status is reported in DF=5 and 21 replies.
interference).
7. BDS register 10 (Data Link Capability Report) is
CS ACNS.D.ELS.015 Data Transmission 7. The data link capability report.
provided.
(continued)
8. BDS register 17 (Common Usage Ground Initiated
8. The common usage GICB capability report.
Comm-B Capability Report) is provided
9. ICAO 24-bit aircraft address is provided in DF=11
9. The ICAO 24-bit aircraft address.
squitters.
10. Resolution Advisory (BDS 3,0) is transmitted as all
10. Aircraft that have ACAS II installed provide
zeros, as the GTX units do not support an interface
the ACAS active resolution advisory report.
with ACAS II.
b) All other data transmitted is verified.
1. If the system transmits one or more
additional downlink airborne parameters in The installation data requires a transponder / ADS-B test to
addition to those listed in paragraph (a), be run IAW Part 43 applicable regulatory tests.
then the relevant sub specifications of CS
ACNS.D.EHS.015 are also complied with.

Rev. 24 Page E-3

2. If the system transmits additional
parameters on the extended squitter and if
their full compliance with CS ACNS.D.ADSB
has not been verified, as a minimum the
CS ACNS.D.ELS.015 Data Transmission The installation data requires a transponder / ADS-B test to
aircraft identification, pressure altitude,
(continued) be run IAW Part 43 applicable regulatory tests.
ICAO 24-bit aircraft address is identical to
those transmitted in the Mode S replies.
Additionally the position and velocity
quality indicators reports the lowest quality.
a) The on-the-ground status is not set by a The GTX 335/335R/345/345R software's air/ground state
manual action. will be automatically determined based on emitter
category, remote air/ground state, ground speed, GPS
track, airspeed, squat switch, height above terrain, and
radio altitude when possible. The on-the-ground status
CS ACNS.D.ELS.020 On-the-Ground Status cannot be set my manual action.
Determination The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units will report the airborne
state in FS fields 4, 5, 20, 21 and the CA field of DF 11.
b) If automatic determination of the on-the-
Furthermore, DF 11 provides the additional capability of
ground status is not available, the on-the
identifying if the aircraft didn't know the air/ground state
ground status is set to airborne.
by transmitting a CA code of 6 or 7 which still translates to
an AIRBORNE state.
a) The reported pressure altitude is obtained The installation manual provides approved altitude
from an approved source. interfaces.
When the unit retrieves valid pressure altitude data, the
b) The altitude resolution is equal to or less unit sets the altitude precision of the system based on the
than 30.48 m (100 ft). data source and the precision field, with a worst-case
resolution of 100ft.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.025 Altitude Source The GTX 335/335R/345/345R provides the option to utilize
the Garmin Altitude Encoder which interfaces to the
existing aircraft static system and provides the altitude
c) The altitude source connected to the active
data via I2C to the GTX. It is required to conduct a
transponder is the source being used to fly
transponder test upon completion of the installation,
the aircraft.
which also requires an altitude inspection to compare the
input altitude to the aircraft altitude and broadcasted
altitude.

Rev. 24 Page E-4

a) A means is provided: The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units provide the following:
1. Mode A code entry either on the panel or from a
1. To select Mode A Code, including
compatible control device, e.g., GTN 6XX/7XX, GNS
emergency indicators.
480, or GX000.
2. Ident can be activated via front panel button, discrete
2. To initiate the IDENT (SPI) feature.
input, or compatible control device.
3. For an aircraft identification to be inserted 3. Flight ID is entered from the transponder main page
by the flight crew if the aircraft uses on panel mounted units. For remote units, Flight ID is
variable aircraft identification. entered remotely from a compatible control device.
4. The GTX 3X5 provides a means to inhibit the
4. To notify the flight crew when the transmission of pressure altitude. The means is
transmission of pressure altitude through selection of ON mode or Standby mode. The
information has been inhibited, if a means flight crew is notified when transmission of pressure
to inhibit the transmission of pressure altitude is inhibited, via the annunciation of ON or
altitude is provided. Standby mode on the front panel or remotely on a
compatible control device.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.030 Flight Deck Interface
5. The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units are equipped with
5. To select the transponder to the 'standby' an OFF and STBY key. Remotely installed units are
or “OFF” condition. controlled serially and provide a means to place the
unit in OFF or STBY.
6. Failure messages are provided to the display of panel
6. To indicate the non-operational status or
mounted units. Failure messages are provided to the
failure of the transponder system without
control source of remotely installed units. Failure
undue delay and without the need for
messages are documented in the maintenance
flight crew action.
manual.
7. Mode A codes are displayed and entered from the
7. To display the selected Mode A code to the transponder main page on Panel mounted units. For
flight crew. remote units, Mode A codes are displayed and
entered remotely from a compatible control device.
8. Flight ID is displayed on the transponder main page
8. To display the aircraft identification to the
on Panel mounted units. For remote units, Flight ID is
flight crew
displayed remotely on a compatible control device.

Rev. 24 Page E-5

b) Input which is not intended to be operated
CS ACNS.D.ELS.030 Flight Deck Interface The Transponders have a Ground Test mode, which
in flight, is not readily accessible to the flight
(continued) requires a unit power cycle while depressing a soft key.
crew.
Mode S operations are classified as a Minor failure
The Mode S ELS airborne surveillance system classification for the GTX 335/335R/345/345R units.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.040 Integrity integrity is designed commensurate with a The transponder is designed to meet design assurance
“minor” failure condition. level C which exceeds the “minor” failure classification for
Mode S ELS.
The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units have a design
The Mode S ELS airborne surveillance system assurance level of C “remote” for listed functions.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.045 Continuity continuity is designed to an allowable qualitative The GTX 335/335R/345/345R units also have a maximum
probability of “remote.” ELS system failure rate of no less than 5000 hours using
the MTBF rates, or 2.0E-04 failure rate.
Dual transponder installations are configured by the
If more than one transponder is installed, installer.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.050 Dual/multiple
simultaneous operation of transponders is A compatible control device (e.g., GTN 6XX/7XX) or a
Transponder Installation
prevented. compatible external standby input discrete ensures that
only one transponder can be in a state other than standby.
The ICAO address is programmed as part of the
The ICAO 24-bit aircraft address assigned by the
CS ACNS.D.ELS.055 ICAO 24-bit Aircraft transponder configuration by the installer and verified as
competent authority is correctly implemented on
Address part of the transponder configuration and return to service
each transponder.
procedures.
a) The installed antenna(s) has (have) a
resulting radiation pattern which is (are)
Transponder antenna must be compliant to
vertically polarized, omni-directional in the
TSO 112( ), TSO C66( ) or C74( ).The installation manual
horizontal plane, and has (have) sufficient
provides a list of compatible antennas.
CS ACNS.D.ELS.060 Antenna Installation vertical beam width to ensure proper system
operation during normal aircraft maneuvers.
b) Antenna(s) is/are located such that the effect The installation of the antennas is not covered by this
on the far field radiation pattern(s) by the installation manual, however, guidance for the antenna
aircraft structure are minimized. locations is provided in the installation manual.

Rev. 24 Page E-6

Aircraft with a maximum certified take-off mass
in excess of 5700 kg or a maximum cruising true
airspeed capability, under International Standard
CS ACNS.D.ELS.065 Antenna Diversity GTX 3X5D units support diversity operation.
Atmosphere (ISA) conditions, in excess of
130 m/s (250 knots) operates with an antenna
diversity installation.

Rev. 24 Page E-7
E.2 Enhanced Surveillance (EHS)

The information in table E-2 is applicable to GTX 335/335R/345/345R units running software v2.10 and later and GTX 335D/335DR/345D/345DR units running
software v2.50 and later.
Table E-2 EHS
CS-ACNS SECTION CS-ACNS DESCRIPTION COMPLIANCE SUMMARY

a) This section provides standards for airborne
Mode S EHS installations which provide on
request (through Mode S replies elicited by See CS ACNS.D.EHS.015 (c)
Mode S interrogations) airborne parameters in See CS ACNS.D.EHS.015 (a) (8) (c)
CS ACNS.D.EHS.001 Applicability addition to parameters provided by ELS
installations compliant with Section 2
b) This certification specification is applied The GTX 3X5 was shown in the GTX 335/335R/
together with Mode S Elementary Surveillance 345/345R ELS CS-ACNS compliance matrix to be
certification specification defined in Section 2. compliant to CS.ACNS.D.ELS.
a) The transponder is an approved Mode S The GTX 3X5 complies with TSO-C112e
transponder with EHS capability. requirements for enhanced surveillance. See
CS ACNS.D.EHS.010 Transponder Characteristics table 1-13 and table 1-14 of the installation manual
for applicable system TSO approvals and software
part numbers.

Rev. 24 Page E-8

a) The surveillance system provides in the Mode S The GTX 3X5 was shown in the GTX 335/335R/
reply the following downlink aircraft 345/345R ELS CS-ACNS compliance matrix to be
parameters in addition to those specified in CS compliant to CS.ACNS.D.ELS.
ACNS.D.ELS: In addition, the GTX provides the following
downlink aircraft parameters when available from
input interfaces:
1. MCP/FCU Selected Altitude: is transmitted in
1. MCP/FCU Selected Altitude
BDS 4,0 by the GTX.
2. Roll Angle: is transmitted in BDS 5,0 by the
2. Roll Angle
GTX.
3. True Track Angle: is transmitted in BDS 5,0 by
3. True Track Angle
the GTX.
4. Ground Speed: is transmitted in BDS 5,0 by the
4. Ground Speed
GTX.
5. Magnetic Heading: is transmitted in BDS 6,0 by
CS ACNS.D.EHS.015 Data Transmission 5. Magnetic Heading
the GTX.
6. Indicated Airspeed and Mach No: are
6. Indicated Airspeed or Mach No.
transmitted in BDS 6,0 by the GTX.
7. Vertical rate: Barometric Altitude rate or
7. Vertical Rate: Barometric altitude rate and
Inertial vertical velocity. When barometric
Inertial Vertical Velocity are transmitted in BDS
altitude rate field is provided, it is derived
6,0 by the GTX.
solely from barometric measurement.
8. Barometric Pressure Setting in use minus 80 8. Barometric Pressure Setting: is transmitted in
000 Pascal. BDS 4,0.
9. True Airspeed is transmitted in BDS 5,0 by the
9. Track Angle Rate or True Airspeed.
GTX. Track Angle Rate is not transmitted.
b) The sensor sources connected to the active Input interfaces are configured during installation.
transponder are the sensors relevant to the Data source selection guidance is provided in the
aircraft flight profile. installation manual.
c) All transmitted parameters are correct and are Check-out procedures are provided in the installation
correctly indicated as available. manual. Periodic inspections are also required.

Rev. 24 Page E-9

The Mode S EHS airborne surveillance system
The GTX 3X5 is designed to meet design assurance
integrity is designed commensurate with a 'minor'
CS ACNS.D.EHS.020 Integrity level C which exceeds the “minor” failure
failure condition for the downlink aircraft
classification for Mode S EHS.
parameters listed in CS ACNS.D.EHS.015.
The GTX 3X5 units have a design assurance level of
The Mode S EHS airborne surveillance system C 'remote' for listed functions which exceeds the
CS ACNS.D.EHS.025 Continuity continuity is designed to an allowable qualitative allowable qualitative probability of “probable.”
probability of “probable” for the downlink aircraft The GTX units have a maximum EHS system failure
parameters listed in CS ACNS.D.EHS.015. rate of no less than 5000 hrs using the MTBF rates,
or 2.0E-04 failure rate.

Rev. 24 Page E-10
E.3 ADS-B
NOTE
For Garmin GPS source documentation and to confirm assumptions, refer to 14 CFR 91.227 ADS-B Out Compatible Equipment.
The information in table E-3 is applicable to GTX 335/335R/335D/335DR/345/345R/345D/345DR units.
Table E-3 ADS-B

This section provides standards for 1090 MHz Information only, no compliance statement
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.001 Applicability
Extended Squitter (ES) ADS-B Out installations. necessary.
The GTX units are TSO Class 1 Level 2 transponder
with Level C (Major) Failure classification with SI
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.010 ADS-B Out System The equipment contributing to the ADS-B Out mode capability. They are 1090ES capable
Approval function is approved. transponders that require a valid pressure altitude
source, a valid GPS source, and meet ELS
requirements.
a) The ADS-B Out system provides the following
minimum set of data parameters:
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.020 ADS-B Out Data 1. Supported in BDS (0,8) Aircraft Identification

Parameters and Category, and sourced from the operator via
1. Aircraft Identification the GTX panel, a compatible control device, or
transponder configuration settings. Priority: (1)
Flight ID, (2) Aircraft Registration

Rev. 24 Page E-11

2. Mode A code is supported in BDS (6,1) and
entered from the transponder main page on
2. Mode A Code Panel mounted units. For remote units, Mode A
codes are provided / entered remotely via a
compatible control device.
3. All DF=17 squitter transmissions provide the
ICAO address. Aircraft address data is sourced
3. ICAO 24-bit aircraft address
from transponder internal configuration
settings.
4. 4.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.020 ADS-B Out Data a. Airborne Horizontal Position - Latitude a. Supported in BDS (0,5) Airborne Position
Parameters and Longitude
(continued)
b. Airborne Navigation Integrity Category: b. Supported in BDS (0,5) Airborne Position
NIC
c. Airborne/Surface Navigation Accuracy c. Supported in BDS (6,2) Target State and
Category for Position: NACp Status and (6,5) Aircraft Operational
Status
d. Airborne/Surface Source Integrity Level: d. Supported in BDS (6,2) Target State and
SIL Status and (6,5) Aircraft Operational
Status
e. Airborne/Surface System Design e. Supported in BDS (6,5) Aircraft
Assurance: SDA Operational Status

Rev. 24 Page E-12

5. Supported in BDS (0,5) Airborne Position. An
encoding altimeter or other altitude source
5. Pressure Altitude (incl. NICbaro)
provides this data to the transponder. NICbaro
is provided in BDS register (6,2) and (6,5).
6. Supported in BDS (6,5) Aircraft Operational
Status. SPI data is sourced from transponder
internal IDENT status. The IDENT function is
6. Special Position Identification (SPI)
controlled via GTX or via remote located
button, which can also be activated via
approved control source.
7. 7.
a. Emergency Status a. Supported in BDS (6,1) Emergency/
Priority Status.
b. Emergency Indication b. Data is sourced from current Mode A
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.020 ADS-B Out Data code status. The Mode A code is entered
Parameters and displayed via the GTX panel or a
(continued) compatible control device.
8. 1090 ES Version Number
Status, Bits 41-43 are populated with '2'.
9. 9.
a. Airborne velocity over Ground - (East/ a. Supported in BDS (0,9) Airborne Velocity
West and North/South Subtype 1&2.
b. Airborne/Surface Navigation Accuracy b. Supported in BDS (0,9) Airborne Velocity
Category for Velocity: NACv Subtype 1&2.
10. Supported in BDS (0,8) Extended Squitter
10. Emitter Category Identification and data source from
transponder configuration.
11. Vertical Rate 11. Supported in BDS (0,9) Airborne Velocity
12. 12.

Rev. 24 Page E-13

a. Surface Horizontal Position - Latitude and a. Supported in BDS (0,6) Surface Position
Longitude
b. Surface Navigation Integrity Category: NIC b. Supported in BDS (0,6) Surface Position
and (6,5) Aircraft Operational Status.
When the GPS mode is SBAS Nav, the
GTX 3X5 limits the radius of containment
to greater than or equal to 25 meters,
otherwise it limits this value to greater
than or equal to 75 meters
13. Surface Ground Track 13. Supported in BDS (0,6) Surface Position
14. Movement (surface ground speed) 14. Supported in BDS (0,6) Surface
15. Length/width of Aircraft Status Subtype 1. Data sourced from
transponder configuration.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.020 ADS-B Out Data 16. GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset Status Subtype 1. Data sourced from
Parameters transponder configuration.
(continued)
17. 17.
a. Geometric Altitude a. Supported in BDS (0,9) Airborne Velocity.
b. Geometric Altitude Quality: GVA b. Supported in BDS (6,5) Aircraft
Operational Status Subtype 0.
Where available in a suitable format, the ADS-B Out

system provides the following data parameters:
1. Supported in BDS (6,2) Target State and Status
1. Selected Altitude
Information.
2. Supported in BDS (6,2) Target State and Status
2. Barometric Pressure Setting
Information.
3. The GTX units do not interface with ACCAS II
3. ACAS Resolution Advisory units and thus do not support ACAS II
resolution advisory data.

Rev. 24 Page E-14

a) All data provided by the ADS-B Out system Approved GPS sources consist of Garmin GPS sources
comes from approved sources. (see Note 1) and compatible ARINC 743A sources
that are approved for the installation.
b) The data transmitted by the ADS-B Out system The ADS-B Out system is integrated in the GTX
originates from the same data source as used in transponder units. ADS-B related BDS registers are
the transponder replies to Mode S populated with the same DAP parameters used to
interrogations. populate transponder registers.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.025 Provision of Data
Data quality parameters are only used for data
c) When a data quality indication is required, it is parameters from the same source interface (e.g., the
provided to the ADS-B transmit unit together same A429 channel). An ADS-B Fail indication is
with the associated data parameter and it provided when the quality of the GPS position source
expresses the actual quality of the respective is below the allowable tolerance. In addition, other
data as valid at the time of applicability of the data parameters will only be processed when their
measurement. associated validity flags (if applicable) indicate the
parameter is valid.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.030 ADS-B Transmit Unit The ADS-B transmit unit is approved and it is The GTX 3X5 units have TSOA and meet TSO-C112d
Approval integrated in the Mode S transponder. and TSO-C166b with granted deviations.
The ICAO address is programmed as part of the
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.035 ICAO 24-bit Aircraft The ICAO 24 bit aircraft address is implemented as transponder configuration by the installer and
address specified in CS ACNS.D.ELS.055. verified as part of the transponder configuration and
return to service procedures.
The ADS-B transmit unit employs antenna diversity GTX 3X5D units support diversity operation.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.040 Antenna Diversity under the same conditions as specified in CS
ACNS.D.ELS.065.
Transponder antenna must be compliant to TSO-
C66( ), TSO-C74( ), or TSO-C112( ). Antenna
The antenna is installed as specified in CS installations are not covered in the design/installation
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.045 Antenna Installation
ACNS.D.ELS.060. data however, minimum installation requirements
are provided under the antenna installation guidance
in sections 3.7 and 3.15 of the installation manual.
The GTX 3X5 units meets the minimum and
The ADS-B transmit unit has a peak transmit power maximum transmit power level, 125 W (21 dBW) and
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.050 Transmit power
as specified in CS ACNS.D.ELS.010(c);(d). 500 W (27 dBW), respectively, when installed
according to the installation manual.

Rev. 24 Page E-15

Dual transponder installations are configured by the
installer.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.055 Simultaneous Operation of If more than one ADS-B transmit unit is installed,
A compatible control device (e.g., GTN 6XX/7XX) or a
ADS-B Transmit Units simultaneous operation of the transmit systems is
compatible external standby input discrete ensures
prevented.
that only one transponder can be in a state other
than standby.
a) The on-the-ground status is determined and The GTX 3X5 units automatically transitions the
validated by the ADS-B Out system. aircraft mode from airborne to ground-borne and
report surface mode, broadcasting ground-only
information such as aircraft length and width based
on an algorithm within the GTX ADS-B system.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.060 On-the-ground status
determination The GTX 3X5 software's air/ground state will be
automatically determined based on emitter category,
b) The on-the-ground status is not set by a remote air/ground state, ground speed, GPS track,
manual action. airspeed, squat switch, height above terrain, and
radio altitude when possible. The on-the-ground
status cannot be set my manual action.
a) The horizontal position is derived from GNSS Horizontal position data will be derived from
data. approved GPS sources.
b) The GNSS receiver based horizontal position Refer to Garmin GPS source documentation (see
and velocity data source is approved and Note 1).
performs, as a minimum, horizontal position Refer to the position source documentation for non-
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.070 Horizontal Position and receiver autonomous integrity monitoring Garmin GPS sources.
Velocity Data Sources (RAIM) and fault detection and exclusion (FDE).
Horizontal velocity data is ground speed and N/S E/W
velocity provided in BDS register (0,6) when on
c) Horizontal velocity data stems from the same ground and BDS register (0,9) when airborne. Both
source as horizontal position data. position and velocity are used from the same selected
position source.
a) The data source requirements as defined for in Refer to table E-1 and table E-2 of the installation
section 2 and 3 of this subpart, are applicable. manual for the GTX 3X5 ELS and EHS CS-ACNS
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.080 Data Sources as defined by compliance matrices for Mode S, ELS and EHS data.
Mode S Elementary and Enhanced Surveillance
GTX 335/335R/345/345R units with software version

2.05 and earlier are not EHS capable units.

Rev. 24 Page E-16

a) Geometric Altitude is provided by the The GTX 3X5 sources Geometric Altitude from the
horizontal position and velocity source (see CS selected GPS source, which is also the horizontal
ACNS.D.ADSB.070). position and velocity source.
The geometric altitude from the approved position
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.085 Geometric Altitude sources is provided as the height above the WGS-84
b) Geometric Altitude is transmitted as height ellipsoid in the APM (BDS register 0,5) when type
above WGS-84 ellipsoid. codes 20-22 are transmitted, and in AVM (BDS
register 0,9) as a difference between GPS and BARO
altitude.
1. The control and display of surveillance data Refer to the GTX 335/335R/345/345R ELS CS-ACNS
items is as per CS ACNS.D.ELS.030. compliance matrix.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.090 Flight deck interface
ADS-B Out failure indications are provided on the
2. A means is provided to indicate the non- GTX front panel, panel annunciators, or to a
operational status or failure of the ADS-B Out compatible control device any time the ADS-B Out
system without undue delay. system constitutes a failure.
a) The ADS-B Out system integrity is designed
commensurate with a 'major' failure condition
for the transmission of the following
parameters:
1. ICAO 24-bit aircraft address
2. Airborne Horizontal Position - Latitude and
Longitude
3. Airborne Navigation Integrity Category: NIC level C which meets the 'major' failure classification
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.100 Integrity for ADS-B Out. All approved position sources are
4. Airborne/Surface Navigation Accuracy designed to meet at least a 'major' failure
Category for Position: NACp classification.
5. 5.Airborne/Surface Source Integrity Level: SIL;
6. 6.Airborne/Surface System Design Assurance:
SDA
7. 1090 ES Version Number;
8. Airborne velocity over Ground - East/West and
North/South;

Rev. 24 Page E-17

9. Airborne/Surface Navigation Accuracy
Category for Velocity: NACv
10. Emitter Category
11. Surface Horizontal Position - Latitude and
Longitude
12. Surface Navigation Integrity Category: NIC level C which meets the 'major' failure classification
13. Surface Ground Track for ADS-B Out. All approved position sources are
designed to meet at least a 'major' failure
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.100 Integrity 14. Movement (surface ground speed) classification.
(continued)
15. Length/width of Aircraft
16. GPS Antenna Offset
17. Geometric Altitude
18. Geometric Altitude Quality: GVA
GTX 3X5 is designed to meet design assurance level
b) The ADS-B Out system integrity is designed C which exceeds the 'minor' failure classification for
commensurate with a 'minor' failure condition TSO-C166b 3.b loss of ADS-B Out transmission as a
for the transmission of other data parameters. 'minor' failure condition.
The GTX 3X5 units have a design assurance level of C
'remote' for listed functions.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.105 Continuity The ADS-B Out system continuity is designed to an
The GTX units have a maximum ADS-B system failure
allowable qualitative probability of 'remote'.
rate of no less than 5000 hrs using the MTBF rates, or
2.0E-04 failure rate.
For Garmin GPS sources an update rate of 5 Hz is
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.110 Horizontal Position and A horizontal position and velocity source calculates assumed (see Note 1).
Velocity Data Refresh Rate position and velocity data with a rate of at least 1
For non-Garmin GPS sources, the worst case update
Hertz.
rate (1 Hz) is assumed.

Rev. 24 Page E-18

For a GPS source with a 5 Hz update rate:
Position solution update delay until the next solution
overwrite is relayed to the transponder <= 200 ms (5
Hz update rate).
The GTX 3X5 introduces an additional total latency of
<= 400 ms to the ADS-B Out system. Therefore, the
worst case total latency of the ADS-B Out system
with a 5 Hz rate source and the listed assumptions is
Measured from the time of applicability within the <= 850 ms.
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.115 Horizontal Position and source, the total latency of the horizontal position
Velocity Total Latency For a GPS source with a 1 Hz update rate (ARINC
and horizontal velocity data introduced by the
743) and total latency contribution <= 200 ms:
ADS-B Out system does not exceed 1.5 second.
Position solution update delay until the next solution
overwrite is relayed to the transponder <= 1000 ms
(1 Hz update rate).
The GTX 3X5 introduces an additional total latency of
<= 250 ms to the ADS-B Out system. Therefore, the
total latency of the ADS-B Out system with a 1 Hz
rate GPS source and the listed assumptions is <=
1450 ms.
Uncompensated latency introduced by an approved
GPS source is assumed to be <= 250 ms. See Note 1
for GPS source documentation.
Refer to the position source documentation for non-
Garmin GPS sources.
The GTX 3X5 introduces an additional
CS ACNS.D.ADSB.120 Horizontal Position The uncompensated latency of the horizontal
uncompensated latency of <= 150 ms to the ADS-B
Uncompensated Latency position data introduced by the ADS-B Out System
Out system when interfacing the GTX 3X5 to the
does not exceed 0.6 second.
position source via the RS-232 GNS format,
otherwise the GTX 3X5 introduces <= 100 ms of
uncompensated latency.
Therefore, the worst case uncompensated latency of
the ADS-B Out system with an approved GPS source
and given the listed assumptions is <= 400 ms.
[1] Refer to 14 CFR 91.227 ADS-B Out Compatible Equipment, P/N 190-01533-00, for Garmin GPS source documentation.

Rev. 24 Page E-19
AC 20-165B Compliance Matrix
Appendix F AC 20-165B Compliance Matrix

Table F-1 provides supplemental guidance for the AC 20-165B compliance matrix for the GTX 3X5 when using non-Garmin position sources.
Table F-1 GTX 3X5 ADS-B Position Sources
AC 20-165B SECTION AC 20-165B ITEM DESCRIPTION COMPLIANCE SUMMARY

If the integrity value of the output cannot be trusted
The GTX 3X5 limits the NIC value to 8 or less when the GPS data
B.3.5.2 Validity Limit. beyond a certain limit, indicate this limitation in the design
is sourced from an ARINC 743 format source.
documentation.
Some position sources report the HPL on a per approach basis
The position source manufacturer must provide information
(Kh = 6.18) during an approach instead of a per hour basis (Kh =
describing the basis for the probability of exceeding the
6.0). Thus, the position source reported HPL is 3% lower during
horizontal integrity containment radius. This basis must
B.3.6 Position Integrity approach than in other modes.
indicate
(Probability).
the probability of exceeding the integrity containment
The GTX 3X5 inflates the HPL received from an ARINC 743A
radius as well as the sampling duration (per-hour or per-
position source by 3% when label 273, the GNSS sensor status,
sample).
indicates SBAS NAV, GBAS/ GRAS NAV, or Approach mode.
The position source should have a velocity accuracy output
The GTX 3X5 will use a default HFOMv of 9 meters/second for a
that was qualified in conjunction with the system’s TSOA or
743A format source that has not provided HFOMv data. This
design approval. Instead of a dynamic output, the position
converts to a NACV = 1.
source manufacturer may demonstrate a worst case velocity
accuracy that can be assumed based on testing. A test for
B.3.8 Velocity Accuracy. The GTX 3X5 will use dynamically received HFOMv from label
GNSS position sources is contained in the latest revision of
145 if it has been received. When using the GTX 3X5 with an
AC 20-138, appendix 4. The position source manufacturer
ARINC 743 position source that does not provide HFOMv via
may propose a test method for non-GNSS sources or an
Label 145, the installer must verify that the position source is
alternate test for GNSS sources during the TSOA or design
certified for a fixed NACv of 1 or better.
approval.
The position source must be able to identify, and output, an
indication of an integrity fault. This indication should occur The GTX 3X5 will invalidate the HPL, HFOM, HFOMv, VPL, VFOM,
B.3.5.3 Integrity Fault. within 8 seconds of output of an erroneous position. The and VFOMv when label 130 is received with the RAIM alarm bit
position source manufacturer must provide information on set.
how this integrity fault is output.

Rev. 24 Page F-1

The position source manufacturer must provide position
source latency information. Specifically, the manufacturer
must provide the amount of position source total latency
and uncompensated latency. Because the latency
requirements are based on the entire ADS-B OUT system,
and not just the position source, the following position
B.3.12 Position Source
source latency targets are only guidelines. Position source Refer to appendix E for latency of the ADS-B out system.
Latency.
uncompensated latency should be less than 200 ms,
compensated latency should be less than 500 ms, and total
latency should be less than 700 ms.
Note 1: System latency requirements are described in
section 3.1.3 and Appendix C of this AC.
Note 2: This section addresses position latency only.
GNSS position sources must provide a latitude and
longitude output. Requirements and test procedures in
TSO-C129/145/146/196 are sufficient and GNSS equipment
with TSOA for the aforementioned TSOs require no
additional qualification for the position output. Some GNSS
position outputs are referenced to the center of navigation
of the aircraft. Manufacturers should document under what
The lateral and longitudinal offset configuration items of the
conditions the position is output in this manner. Installers
GTX 3X5 are used.
must configure the ADS-B installation to account for any
B.4.1 Position.
position offset from the surveillance reference point or
The GNSS sensor should be configured to not apply a position
GNSS antenna position as applicable. Note: The intent is to
offset to the position output.
output position, velocity, and HFOM in a consistent manner
for time
of applicability (refer to RTCA/DO-229D, Minimum
Operational Performance Standards for Global Positioning
System/Wide Area Augmentation System Airborne
Equipment,
sections 2.1.2.6 and 2.1.2.6.2).
Position sources should output a time mark identifying the The GTX 3X5 does not utilize the time mark pulse to reduce
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time of applicability of uncompensated latency. The GTX 3X5 does not use time mark
B.3.14 Time Mark.
the position. The time mark can be used by the ADS-B for ADS-B out. Refer to section 3.11 for details of time mark use
equipment to reduce uncompensated latency. for ADS-B In.

Rev. 24 Page F-2

Whether a TSO-C145 or TSO-C146 position source limits
the HPL in non-SBAS augmented modes to greater than 75
meters. If the position source does not limit the HPL output
in non-augmented modes, the position source
The GTX 3X5 limits the NIC to 8 or less when GPS data is sourced
B.4.7.2 manufacturer should provide guidance to the ADS-B system
from an ARINC 743A format source.
installer to ensure the ADS-B equipment limits the NIC to .8
in non-augmented modes. The position source
manufacturer should also provide instructions on how to
determine the position source mode if appropriate.
Means of compliance for this TSO require GNSS
manufacturers to present substantiation data whether HPL
is limited or not, and provide proper installation instructions
for the
ADS-B integration. Installations intending to support NIC .9
must use LNAV/VNAV or LPV/LP approach requirements
(RTCA/DO-229C, section 2.1) at the time of HPL output,
B.4.7.2.2 TSO-C145/146 See the comment for B.3.6 Position Integrity (Probability) for
in accordance with TSO-C145/C146 Rev a, but the en route
Rev a Class 2/3. more information.
through LNAV K-Factor (6.18 vs. 6) must be applied (refer
to RTCA/DO-229C, appendix J, section 2.1 and appendix U,
section 4). Either the GNSS source equipment sets the K-
Factor for HPL, or the ADS-B equipment applies proper
scaling. The GNSS manufacturer must present
substantiation data on which K-Factor is used and provide
proper installation instructions for the ADS-B integration.
For installations intending to support NACV = 1, the GNSS
manufacturer must perform the velocity tests in AC 20-
138D, appendix 4, section A4-1 through A4-8 associated
See the comment for B.3.8 Velocity Accuracy for more
B.4.14.1 NACV = 1. with
information.
NACV = 1. The GNSS manufacturer must indicate that the
equipment satisfies the requirements for NACV =1 in the
installation instructions for the ADS-B integration.

Rev. 24 Page F-3

For installations intending to support NACV = 2, the GNSS
manufacturer must perform the velocity tests in AC 20-
138D, appendix 4, sections A4-1 through A4-9 associated
with NACV = 1 and NACV = 2. The GNSS manufacturer
must present substantiation data that the equipment
dynamically outputs HFOMv and VFOMv (refer to AC 20- See the comment for B.3.8 Velocity Accuracy for more
B.4.14.2 NACV = 2.
138(), appendix 4, sections A4-5 and A4-8) and that the information.
equipment velocity and accuracy outputs have passed the
velocity tests associated with NACV = 1 and NACV = 2. The
GNSS manufacturer must indicate that the equipment
satisfies the requirements for NACV = 2 in the installation
instructions for the ADS-B integration.
No standard for performance has been developed to
support NACv = 3 or NACV = 4. A NACV = 3 or NACV = 4
should not be set based on GNSS velocity accuracy unless it
B.4.14.3 NACV = 3 or 4. The GTX 3X5 limits the NACV to a maximum value of 2.
can be demonstrated to the FAA that the error
contributions have been adequately modeled to meet those
levels of performance.
If interpretation of the integrity output of the position
source can change due to a change in the position source
mode, the position source must have a way of
See the comment for B.3.6 Position Integrity (Probability) for
B.4.16 Mode Output. communicating that change of mode to the ADS-B
more information.
equipment. Additionally, the position source manufacturer
should provide a description of the modes and a description
of how the position source outputs the mode indication.

Rev. 24 Page F-4

SBAS equipment certified under any revision of TSO-C145
or TSO-C146 is required to have several modes of operation
depending on the availability of augmentation. For
example, when operating in an augmented mode intended
for LPV approach guidance, the position source may
determine HPL based on a lateral error versus a horizontal
error and an exposure time based on the duration of the
approach versus flight hour (refer to RTCA/DO-229D,
appendix J). If the position source outputs the HPL on lateral
error and approach exposure time, it is possible that the
B.4.17 Approach Mode ADS-B transmitter would need to inflate the HPL by 3 See the comment for B.3.6 Position Integrity (Probability) for
Integrity. percent in approach modes to ensure the integrity is more information.
appropriately bounded. GBAS equipment is required to
comply with the GNSS or SBAS requirements for the output
of position data. This is an integration issue between the
GPS and ADSB transmitter. The position source
manufacturer must provide information to the system
integrator to determine if the integrity output needs to be
scaled (that is, by applying an inflation factor). Although we
do not address the interface of a GBAS differentially-
corrected position source in this AC, it will have similar
considerations in approach modes as SBAS.
GNSS position sources can provide a track angle; however,
the GNSS track angle may become invalid below a certain
velocity. Optimally, the position source should either
B.4.18 Track Angle invalidate or remove the track angle when it is no longer The GTX 3X5 will not use GPS ground track for ADS-B out if the
Validity. valid. If the position source does not invalidate the track ground speed is less than 7 knots.
angle or remove the track angle when it is potentially
invalid, the position source manufacturer must provide
information on velocity limitations for GNSS track angle.

Rev. 24 Page F-5

190-01499-02_24

Uploaded by

190-01499-02_24

Uploaded by

GTX 3X5 Transponder

TSO Installation Manual

190-01499-02 January 2024 Revision 24

© 2015-2024 Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Revision Revision Date Subject

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

SOFTWARE LICENSE NOTIFICATION

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

5.2 Main Board Connector - J3251 ................................................................................................................. 5-2

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

E.2 Enhanced Surveillance (EHS)...................................................................................................................... E-8

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Figure 3-1 Air Data Discrete Priority Order .......................................................................................................... 3-18

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Figure D-21 GTX 345/345R - Flight Stream Interconnect .....................................................................................D-28

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Table 1-1 GTX 3X5 Units ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Table 3-35 Radio Altitude Source Priority ............................................................................................................. 3-25

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Table A-15 ARINC 735 Traffic Labels....................................................................................................................A-15

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.2 Equipment Description

Table 1-1 GTX 3X5 Units

Pressure sensor module [3] O O O O O O O O O

Night vision goggle compatibility O O O

ATCRBS Mode A/C X X X X X X X X X

ARINC 429 data concentrator X X X X X X X X X

ADS-B In with alerting X X X X

Connext (via Bluetooth) [4] X X X X

ADS-B In and TAS/TCAS I/TCAS II X X X X

Interface to Garmin display X X X X X X X X X

Displays pressure altitude,

[1] Unit ordered with this option included.

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

METAR Meteorological Aviation Report

1.4 ADS-B Capabilities

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.4.3 Installation Approval for ADS-B Systems

1.5 FIS-B Capabilities

1.6 TIS System Capabilities

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.7 Interface Summary

[1] Can be configured to be either input or output on a per-discrete basis.

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Table 1-3 GTX 335 and GTX 345 BDS Registers

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.8 General Specifications

Table 1-4 Physical Characteristics - Panel Mount Units

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

Table 1-5 Physical Characteristics - Remote Mount Units

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

The GTX 3X5 display is a sunlight readable LCD display.

Table 1-6 Display Specifications

Table 1-7 GAE Specifications

1.9 Transponder Specifications

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.10 UAT Receiver Specifications (GTX 345 Only)

1.11 GTX 345 1090 MHz Receiver Specifications

1.12 GPS Specifications (Units with Internal GPS Only)

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual

1.13 Power Specifications

Table 1-12 Power Specifications

190-01499-02 GTX 3X5 Transponder TSO Installation Manual